GIAO AN TIENG ANH 7 NAM HOC 20132014

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.01 MB, 321 trang )

(1)Date of preparing: 19/8/2012. Date of teaching: 21/8/2012- Class 7A-3,5. PERIOD 1 REVIEW AND TEST 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review all the knowledge of class 6. + Vocabulary: have no + Structures: knowledge of class 6. b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson : During the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson . Teacher’s activities Students’ activities *Warm up( 5 ms ) - Organization. Who’s absent today? =>7A:.......;7B.......... - Introduction. T: ask ss to play game. A 1. How old are you? 2. Are you student? 3. Where do you live? 4. Do you go to school at 7am? Ss: play game. * Present and practice ( 25 ms ) T: give examples and explain about them. eg: I am a student. She is a teacher. They are students. I am not a teacher. B a. Yes, I do. b. I live in Muong Sai. c. Yes, I do. d. I’m 11 years old.. * Present simple tense of tobe.

(2) Are you a student? ? How to use and divide to be? Ss: answer T: give examples and explain Ex: She lives in Muong Sai. - I live in Ha Noi She doesn’t live in Moc Chau I don’t live in Yen Chau Do you live in Ha noi ? ? How to use present simple tense? ? How to divide it? Ss: answer T: give examples and explain eg: I am reading book. They are playing soccer. ? How to use present progressive tense? ? How structure does it have?. * To be: divide into 3 forms - is .....: she ,he, it - are ......: they, we, you.. - am........: I. * Present simple tense of verb (+) S + Vs / es + O (-) S +do/does + V + O (?) Do/does + S +V + O ? - Yes, S + do/ does. - No, S + do/does + not * Present progressive tense. S. +. am is + are. V-ing. T: give example and explain Ex: I am going to visit Hue He is going to visit Hue ? How structure does future tense have? * Future tense. ( + ) S + Be going to + V ....... * Production ( 10 ms ) T. give exercise and ask ss to do the exercise Ss: look at exercise T: guide ss to do exercise Ss: do exercise T: call ss to stand up to answer Ss: answer T: correct mistakes * answer: is - lives - is reading – is. * Exercise. Complete the sentences with the correct form. She .....(be) a student. She.....(live) in Muong Sai She ..... (read ) book now. she ...going to visit Ha Noi this summer vacation.. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Listen to the teacher.. d. Guide the homework (2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart all the. - Learn by heart all the structures..

(3) structures. - Ask ss to prepare Unit1( A1,2) for next - Prepare Unit1( A1,2) for next period. period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ =========================================. Date of preparing: 19/8/2012. Date of teaching: 22/8/2012- Class 7A-3,5. PERIOD 2 UNIT 1 BACK TO SCHOOL LESSON 1: A/ FRIENDS (A1,2) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to further speaking about greeting and introduce myself. + Structure: Nice to meet you. ; too ;so am I. + Vocabularies: - Classmate ( n) Bạn cùng lớp - meet (v) gặp nhau b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Text and note-books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3 PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson: During the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson..

(4) Teacher’s activities * Warm up ( 5 ms ). - Organization. - Who’s absent today? =>7A:......;7B:....... - Introduction. ? What did you do during your summer vacation? What do you say when you see your friend again after the summer vacation? ?Are you happy tobe back school again? Ss: answer . T: introduce new lesson . * Presentation ( 10 ms ). T: introduce structure by situation Ss: listen T: give example eg: A.: Nice to meet you B B: Nice to meet you , too A.:I am in class7A B:So am I T: introduce grammar Ss: listen ? Where is too stand ? ? Where is so stand ? Ss: look at eg and answer.. * Practice ( 15 ms ). T: ask ss to read the dialogue part 1- p10 Ss: read in pairs T: ask ss to read in front of class Ss: practice in pairs T: guide ss to read and answer the questions. Ss: read and answer qs T: call ss to stand up to answer Ss: answer T: correct mistakes Ss: writing in their books. Students’ activities. * Grammar and structure. - Nice to see you again. - Nice to meet you. * Phần thêm vào xác định “Too” ‘ so’’ có nghĩa cũng vậy .“Too” được viết ở cuối phần thêm vào. - “so”được viết ở đầu phần thêm vào và đảo ngữ. a lot of : nhiều lots of : nhiều - Dùng trong câu xác định thay cho many ,much (?)(-). *.Now answer a. Her name is Hoa. b. She is in class 7A. c. Nam is also in class 7A..

(5) T: ask ss to look at the picture on page 11 and answer the teacher’s suggested questions: How many schools are there in the picture ? Which school is bigger ? Ss: look at the picture and anwer. T: introduce the content of the lesson. Ss: listen. T: ask ss read and answer the questions. Ss: read and answer . T: call ss to stand up to answer. Ss: answer qs T: correct mistakes. Ss: write correct answer.. *Answers a. She is from Hue . b. she is staying with her uncle and aunt. c. No, she doesn’t have any friend in Ha Noi d. Her new school is bigger than her old school. e. She is unhappy because she misses her parents and her friends .. * Production ( 10 ms ). T: ask ss to compare Hoa’s old and new school, use structure: it has......alot of ...; it bigger/ smaller...... .........new school............old school...... c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Listen to the teacher.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - T ask ss to learn by heart new words and read - Learn by heart new words and the dialogue at home read the dialogue at home - T ask ss to do exercises 1,2,4 on page 3 and 4 - Do exercises 1,2,4 on page 3 in workbook. and 4 in workbook. - T ask ss to prepare Unit 1( A3,4,5,6) for next - Prepare Unit 1( A3,4,5,6) for next period. period * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................

(6) Date of preparing: 21/8/2012. Date of teaching: 24/8/2012- Class 7A-3,5. PERIOD 3 UNIT 1 BACK TO SCHOOL LESSON 2: A/ FRIENDS (A3,4,5,6) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask about someone’s healthy in social English. + Structure: - How is everything? + Vocabulary. - pretty good. - just fine b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Text and note-books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). form: oral - Question: do ex4 p-10? - Answer: b. a lot of ; c. lot of; d. any ; e. a lot of ; f. many - Introduction. T: ask ss to play game slap the board. Ss: play game good morning good afternoon good night good bye good evening b. Teaching the new lesson . Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities.

(7) * Warm up ( 3 ms ). - Organization. - Who’s absent today? - Ss anwer: =>7A:........;7B......... * Presentation ( 8 ms ). T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess Ss: look at the picture and guess ? what are they doing? Ss: they are greeting each other T: introduce content of the dialogue Ss: listen T: guide ss listen and practice Ss: listen * Practice ( 15ms ). - How is everything? - T. ask ss listen and repeat part 3. Ss: listen and repeat - pretty good T: call ss to practice in pairs Ss: practice in pairs - T: guide ss to listen and complete the dialogue in part 4. a. - How are you? Ss: listen and complete - pretty good T: ask ss to listen three times - How about you? Ss: listen and answer - Not bad, T: ask ss to answer - Me, too Ss: answer b. - How is everything? T: correct mistakes - ok- How are you today - Just fine - so am I - T: ask ss to look at the picture p 5 and guess content Ss: look at the picture and guess T: ask ss to listen and write the letters of * Answer keys. dialogue in the order 1-c 3-d Ss: listen and write T: ask ss to answer 2-b 4-a Ss: answer T: correct mistakes. Tape transcript. Ba: Good evening, Mr.Tan. Mr.Tan: Good evening, Ba..

(8) How are you ? Ba: Fine, thanks. Mr.Tan: Are you going home now ? Ba: Yes. My dinner will be ready. Nga: Good morning. Miss Lien. Miss Lien: Good morning. Nice to see you again, Nga. Nga: Nice to see you, too. Miss Lien: Class will begin soon. You must hurry. Nga: Ok. Miss Lien: Good morning, Tan. Mr. Tan: Good morning, Lien. Miss Lien: Do you have the time, please? Mr. Tan: Yes. It’s 6.30. Miss Lien: Thank you. Nga: Good afternoon, Ba. Ba: Good afternoon. How are you, Nga? Nga: I am fine, thanks. How about you? Ba: Not bad. * Production ( 10 ms ). T: ask ss to look at the picture and tell again about content of the picture which you heard Ss: practice in pair T: ask ss to practice in front of class Ss: practice in pairs T. correct mistakes c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - T ask ss to write the dialogue you heard in p-5 in your book. -T ask ss to do exercise 3 p-4. - T ask ss to prepare Unit 1( B1,2) for next period.. - Look at the picture and tell again about content of the picture.. - Ss listen to the teacher. - Ss listen to the teacher carefully. - Write the dialogue you heard in p-5 in your book. - Do exercise 3 p-4. - Prepare Unit 1( B1,2) for next period.

(9) * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ====================================== Date of preparing: 25/8/2012. Date of teaching: 28/8/2012- Class 7A-3,5. PERIOD 4 UNIT 1 BACK TO SCHOOL LESSON 3: B/ NAME AND ADDRESSES (1,2,3) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the dialogue and ask and answer own information as age , name and address. + Structure: - What’s your family name? “ Wh - question”. + Vocabulary: - family name (n) họ - middle name(n) tên đệm b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures, textbook,chalk, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson: During the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm up ( 5 ms ). - Introduce: T: ask ss to play game network. Students’ activities.

(10) Ss: play game which. what. who wh-qs why where ? How are wh - qs used? Ss: It is written in the first sentence outside it is used to make object, subject... * Presentation( 15 ms ). T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess What Miss Lien and Hoa are talking about. Ss: look at and answer T: introduce about new structure Ss: listen and write T: guide ss to read the dialogue Ss: listen. * Structure. What’s your family name? It’s Pham What’s your middle name? It’s Thi * Now answer. a. She is talking to Miss.Lien. b. Her family name is Pham c. Her middle name is Thi. d. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao Street.. * Practice ( 10 ms ). T: guide ss to read the dialogue in pairs Ss: read in pairs T: guide ss read the dialogue and answer the qs. Ss: answer the qs T: call ss to stand up to answer Ss: answer 1 - Who T: correct mistakes 2 - Who Ss: write in their books 3 - What T: aks ss to look at part 2 on page 16 Ss: look at the dialogue. 4 - Where 5 - Where 6 – How. Name: ………………..

(11) T: guide ss to complete the dialogue Ss: complete the dialogue in pairs T: call ss to stand up to answer Ss: answer T: correct mistakes T: ask ss to read all the dialogue Ss: read in pairs * Production ( 10ms ). T: ask ss to look at the form and explain “ This is a personal form”. Give some suggested questions to guide the students to complete the form. ss: Listen and do exercise in pairs. T: call ss to practice in front of class Ss: practice in pairs T: correct mistakes Ss: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Write the same dialogues with new structures. - T ask ss to do exercise 1, 2 on page 6 in the workbook. - T ask ss to prepare Unit 1 ( B4,5) for next period.. Age: ………………… Grade: ……………..... School: ……………… Home address: ………. - Look at the form and explain. - Write down in the notebook.. - Listen to the teacher. - Do the task. - Do exercise 1, 2 on page 6 in the workbook. - Prepare Unit 1 ( B4,5) for next period.. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................

(12) Date of preparing: 26/8/2012. Date of teaching: 29/8/2012 Class 7A-3,5. PERIOD 5 UNIT 1 BACK TO SCHOOL LESSON 4: A/ NAME AND ADDRESSES (B4,5) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer about the distance between two points ; someone go to school , office or school by Which means of transport is + Structure. + How do/does + S + go/ travel? - S + Vs (es) + by + means of transport + How far is it from....to....? - It’s about....meters/ kilometers. + Vocabulary. - not far; kilometers b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). Question: T ask ss to do exercise 1(a) on page 5 in the workbook. Answer: are......am. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 3ms ). - Introduce T: ask ss to play game “Slap the board” ss: play game.. Movie theater. Students’ activities * Answer a. What ís your family name? b.Where do you live? c.What class are you in? d. How old are you?.

(13) Marke t Post office Bike. Bus stop. Schoo l * Presentation ( 10 ms ). T: ask ss to look at the picture part 4 and ask ? where is this? ? what are they doing? ?how do you go to school ?→ this is structure ask about means of transport. T: introduce structure ss: listen and write ?Why do you go to school by bike? ss: It’s far. ? How far is it from your house to your school?→ ask about distance of two places T: Introduce structure. ss: listen and write. T: guide ss to read the dialogue. ss: listen.. - look at the picture. - It’s on the street. - they ‘re riding the bike.. * Structure. - Ask and answer about the means of transport. + How do/does + S + go/ travel? - S + Vs (es) + by + means of transport - Ask and answer about the distance. + How far is it from..to..? - It’s about......meters/ kilometers.. * Practice ( 15 ms ). T: ask ss to practice in pairs ss: practice in pairs T: ask ss to read in front of class ss: practice in pairs T: correct pronunciation ss: correct. - Read the dialogue..

(14) T: ask ss to look at part 5 p- 17 ss: look at picture T: guide ss to practice ask and answer about picture with structure How far..... ss: practice in pairs. T: ask ss to practice in front of class. ss: practice in pairs. T: correct mistakes.. * Production ( 8ms ). T: ask ss to ask and answer about distance between two places and what means they go by. T: call ss to practice in front of class T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. A. How far is it from your house to market? B. It’s about two kilometers A. How far is it from your house to movie theater? B. It’s about 700 meters.. Ss: practice in pairs. Ss: practice in pairs. Ss: Listen to the teacher.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - T: ask ss to learn by heart new structure - Learn by heart new structure and and make sentences with them make sentences with them - T: ask ss to Do exercise 3,4 on page 6 in - Do exercise 3,4 on page 6 in the the workbook. workbook. - T: ask ss to Prepare B6,7 for next period. - Prepare B6,7 for next period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ =================================. Date of preparing: 29/8/2012. Date of teaching: 31/8/2012- Class 7A-3,5. PERIOD 6 UNIT 1 BACK TO SCHOOL LESSON 5: A/ NAME AND ADDRESSES (B6,7) 1.OBJECTIVE..

(15) a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to ask how someone go to school , How far it is form place to place. + Structure. - How far is it from.....to....? - It is about .... meters/ kilometers. + Vocabulary. - have no b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures, textbook,chalks,cassette, tape. b. Students: Text and note-books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - Form: oral * Question: T ask ss to do exercise 3 on page 6 * Answer b. Her family name’s tran. c. She live on 15 thd street. d. It.’s 3 km,, e. She go to school by bike, f. She live with her parents. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 2 ms ). - Introduce. T: Today, we will listen and about distances and fill in the survey form * Pre - listening( 10 ms ). T: ask ss to look at the map ss: look at ? Which places? T: guide ss to listen - from school to Lan’s house. Students’ activities. Ss: listen to the teacher.. Ss: answe Ss: listen to the teacher. Ss: listen to the teacher..

(16) - from Lan’s house to the post office -......................................movie theater - from movie theater to the post office * While- listening( 15 ms ). T: ask ss to listen the dialogues T: ask ss to listen 3 times T: ask ss to stand up to answer T: correct mistakes * Post – listening ( 8 ms) . T: guide ss to look at part 7 on page 18. ss: look at p7 T: guide ss to ask their classmates Where they live , How far..., How they go to school.. ss: ask and fill in the survey form T: help ss with new words ss: practice in pairs T: ask ss to practice in front of class T: correct. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. Ss: answer. Ss: write correct answer.. * Answer keys. a. School to Lan’s house: 300 meters b. Lan’s house to post office: 700 meters c. School to movie theater: 3 km d. movie theater to post office : 2 km. Name: Address: Means of transport: Distance: Ss: practice in front of class.. - Listen to the teacher carefully.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - T ask ss to learn by heart structure and make sentences with them. - T ask ss to do exercise B5- p6 at home. - T ask ss to prepare Unit 2: A123 for next period.. - Learn by heart structure and make sentences with them - Do exercise B5- p6 at home - Prepare Unit 2: A123 for next period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 1/9/2012. Date of teaching: 4/9/2012- Class 7A-3,5.

(17) PERIOD 7 UNIT 2 PERSONAL INFORMATION LESSON 1: A/ TELEPHONE NUMBERS(A1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to read the telephone numbers in English and How to ask and answer about the telephone numbers. + Structure. - What is your telephone number? + Vocabulary. - telephone directory (n) Danh bạ điện thoại. b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - Form: oral *Question: write two structure on the board? * Answer + How do/does + S + go/ travel? - S + Vs (es) + by + means of transport. + How far is it from… to..? - It’s about......meters/ kilometers. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up (2 ms ). - Introduce. - T: ask ss to play bingo game 8 13 10 18 17 7 9 15 14 19 6 12 T: Introduce new lesson. 11 20 16. - Ss: play game.

(18) * Presentation ( 10ms ). - T: ask ss: (?) Where do you find the phone number? - Ss: answer. - T: ask ss to look at p1 and introduce new - Listen to the teacher. lesson => in the telephone directory. * New words. - T: guide ss to read the phone number - telephone number: số điện thoại - telephone directory: DBĐT - Ss: read the phone number in chorus * Note: - The way how to read the telephone number. + Ngắt nhịp sau Code khu vực (8). + Khi đọc cần chia số điện thoại thành từng cụm 3 số một, để người đọc dễ đọc và người nghe dễ hiểu. + Hai số giống nhau đứng liền nhau như (88) có 2 cách đọc: - Dùng từ “double” trước chữ số - Đọc từng số như bình thường Ex: eight – eight or double eight * Practice ( 15ms ). - T: ask ss to practice in pairs. - T: guide ss to listen and write the telephone numbers in part 2 on page 20. - T: ask ss to listen to the tape . - T: let ss to listen 3 times and compare. the result with each other. - T: call ss to stand up to answer. - T: correct mistakes.. * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: guide ss to practice with their classmates, ask and complete the list. - T: go around to help ss. - T: call some pairs to practice in front of class. - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: listen. - Ss: listen to the tape. - Ss: listen and write and compare. - Ss: answer. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * Answers. a. 8251654 b. 8250514 c. 8251936 d. 8351793 e. 8237041 f. 8821652 - Ss: go around class to ask their friends. - Ss: practice. - Ss: practice in front of class..

(19) c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Learn by heart structure and make - Ss: listen and do as the teacher sentences with them requests. - T aks ss to do exercise 1on page 8 at - Do exercise 1on page 8 at home. home - T aks ss to prepare A3,6 for next period. - Prepare A3,6 for next period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ =====================================. Date of preparing: 4/9/2012. Date of teaching: 7/9/2012- Class 7A-3,5. PERIOD 8 UNIT 2 PERSONAL INFORMATION LESSON 2: A/ TELEPHONE NUMBERS(A3,6) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer about the telephone numbers. + Structure. - What is your telephone number? + Vocabulary. - telephone directory (n) Danh bạ điện thoại. b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms )..

(20) form: oral * Question: write these number into letter? 840275; 022854362 * Answer: - eight four oh two seven five. - oh double two eight five four three six two. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up( 4 ms ). - Introduction - Ss listen to the teacher. (?) What will you do on next week? ss. I stay at home (?)Would you like to join a picnic with us? ss: Yes, What time will it start? Where will we meet? T: this is an appointment (?) How to make an appointment or a planning? we will study this lesson. * Presentation ( 13ms ). - T: ask ss to look at part 3 p20and guess what they are doing and talking. - T: introduce the structure asking answering about the telephone number.. - Ss: look at and guess - Ss: listen and write. * Structure. Ask and answer about the telephone number.. - T: guide ss to read the dialogue - T: ask ss to practice in pairs. What’s your telephone number? My telephone number is ……. - Ss: read the dialogue - T: call on some students to ask their - Ss: practice in pairs. classmates and complete the list. * Now ask your classmates and - T: listen, look at and correct if necessary. complete the list. TELEPHONE NAME ADDRESS NUMBER.

(21) * Practice ( 15 ms ).. - Ss: complete the list.. - T: ask ss to look at part 6 and guide ss to read the dialogue - T: ask ss to practice in pairs - T: ask ss to answer the questions. - T: correct mistakes. - Ss: look at p6 read. * Production ( 5 ms ). - T: ask ss to make the same dialogue (change some information as name , where…) - T: call ss to practice in front of class - T: correct. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: answer the questions. * Answer keys. a) Phong is calling b) Han is answering the telephone c) They are talking about Lan d) She will be back at about 6 o’clock e) Phuong will call her again after 6 - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Learn by heart structure and make - Ss: listen and do as the teacher sentences with them. request. - T: ask ss to do exercise 1on page 8 at - Do exercise 1on page 8 at home. home. - T: ask ss to repare A4,5 for next period. - Prepare A4,5 for next period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 9/9/2012. Date of teaching:11/9/2012 - Class 7A1.

(22) 12/9/2012- Class 7A2 PERIOD 9 UNIT 2 PERSONAL INFORMATION LESSON 3: A/ TELEPHONE NUMBERS(A4,5) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to arrange a planning or an appointment in the future. + Structure: the future simple tense: - Will you be free......? - What time will it.....? - Where will we meet? + Vocabulary. ( have no) b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). * Question: The structure asking and answering about the telephone numbers. * Answer: What’s your telephone number? My telephone number is ……. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm up ( 2 ms ). - Introduce the content of the new lesson.. Students’ activities - Ss: listen to the teacher.. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: Which tense is used to make a planning?. - Ss: future tense.

(23) ? How is future tense used?. * Structure. The future simple tense - Ss: answer Dùng để diễn tả sự kiện xảy ra ở tương lai với thời gian được xác định. Ex: He will go home next week. - S + will + V + O........ - Will+ S+ be+ free+...? - What time will it start? - Where will we meet?. - T: ask ss to look at the picture (?)Who are they ? (?)What are they doing? (?) What are they talking about? - T: give structure to make an appointment - T: Introduce the dialogue and guide ss to read. - Ss: look at the picture and answer.. - Ss: listen - Ss: listen. * Practice ( 15 ms ) - T: guide ss to listen and read the dialogue - T ask ss to practice in pairs - T: ask ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. * Answer the questions. - Ss: read in chorus - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: read and answer - Ss: answer - Ss: write in the exercise book. a. Phong and Tam b. They will see a movie c. They will meet at 6.45 d. They will meet in front of the movie theater.. \ * Production( 9 ms ). - T: ask the students to look at the part 5 on page 21. - T: guide ss to listen and write the answers - Ss: Look at the textbook. - T: ask ss to listen 3 times and write the answers. - Ss: listen.

(24) - T: call ss to stand up to answer.. - T: correct mistakes. - Ss: listen and compare the result - Ss: answer - Ss: write in the exercise book. a.Telephone number :8 545 545 b.They will see : a movie c.They will meet at:Lan’s house d. They will go by: bus. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Learn by heart the structure and make - Ss: listen and do as the teacher sentences with them request. - T ask ss to do exercise 5 on page 9 in - Do exercise 5 on page 9 in the the workbook. workbook. - T ask ss to prepare B1,2,3 for next - Prepare B1,2,3 for next period. period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ====================================. Date of preparing: 9/9/2012. Date of teaching: 12/9/2012- Class 7A-1 14/9/2012 Class 7A-2. PERIOD 10 UNIT 2 PERSONAL INFORMATION MY BIRTHDAY(B1,2,3). LESSON 4: B/. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to talk and write ordinal numbers ,and day in a month. + Structure: (have no).

(25) + Vocabulary: Ordinal number. - first ;1st - second: 2nd - third: 3rd - fourth: 4th - ninth: 9th -twelfth: 12th - 4th→...th b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, chalks, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). -Form: oral Question: ask and answer about the phone number? (?) What is your phone number? * Answer. - 022 840 583 b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up( 2 ms ). - Introduction (?) Who is a good student in the class? T: first ,second ,third....are called ordinal numbers * Presentation ( 15ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the section 1 on page 24 and introduce new words T: introduce how to make ordinal numbers. - T: ask ss to listen and repeat. Students’ activities. - Ss: first is Tru; second is Tho; third is Khanh...... - Ss: look at the section 1 - Ss: listen and write. * Ordinal number. - first :1st - second: 2nd - third: 3rd - fourth: 4th - ninth: 9th -twelfth: 12th - 4th→...th - Ss: listen and repeat.

(26) * Practice ( 15 ms ). T: call ss to practice in front of class. - T: guide ss to listen and write date in part 2 on page 24 T: ask ss to listen 3 times and compare T: call ss to stand up to answer T: correct mistakes. - T: ask ss to look at the section 3. - T: guide ss to and write the months in order from first to twelfth - T: call some one to write in the board - T: correct mistakes. - Ss: practice. - Ss: listen - Ss: listen and compare - Ss: answer: - the first of July - the nineteenth - the six - the fourteenth - the seventeenth - the thirty- first - Ss: look at the section 3. - Ss: write - Ss: write * Answer keys. - January - February - March - April - May - June - July - August - September - October - November - December. * Production ( 5 ms ). - T: ask the students to practice in pairs someone read number other write in letter. - T: call some pairs to practice in front of class - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice. - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask them to learn by heart the new words. - Ask them to do some exercises in the. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. - Prepare the next period “B 4,5” before.

(27) work book. going to school. - Ask them to prepare the next period “B 4,5” before going to school. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ================================. Date of preparing: 12/9/2012. Date of teaching: 15/9/2012- Class 7A-2 17/9/2012- Class 7A-1. PERIOD 11 UNIT 2 PERSONAL INFORMATION B/ MY BIRTHDAY(B4,5). LESSON 5:. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to interview someone by question in the dialogue. + Structure: - What’s your date of birth? + My date of birth/ It is …….. + Vocabulary: - nervous (adj) lo lắng bồn chồn - worry (v) lo, lo lắng b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, chalks, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Text and note books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - Form: oral.

(28) - Question: write the ordinal number on the board. * Answer: - first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth........... - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 3 ms ). - T: ask students some suggested questions: (?) What’s your name? (?) What’s your phone number? (?) Where do you live? - T: Introduce the content of the lesson.. Students’ activities. - Ss: guess - Ss: listen. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and - Ss: write new structure guess what they are talking * Structure. - T: introduce structure by situations + ask about the date of birth. - T: introduce the dialogue and new What’s your date of birth structure - Ss: make a list - June eight + ask about address. What’s your address? - 12 THD street - T: ask ss to look at the dialogue and - Ss: practice in pairs. make a list the questions Mr.Tan ask Hoa. * Practice ( 17 ms ). - T. guide ss to read the dialogue - T: ask ss to read again and answer the questions - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - Ss: read and answer - Ss: answer * Answer keys. a. Hoa is 13 years old b. She will be 14 on next birth c. Her birthday is on June eight d. Hoa live with her aunt and uncle e. Hoa is worried because she doesn’t have any friends. f. g. Students’ answers.

(29) h.. - T: ask ss to read the dialogue again and complete this form in part 5 on page 26 - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: read and complete the form. - Ss: answer Student Registration Form Name: Pham Thi Hoa Date of birth: June eighth Address:12 Tran Hung Dao Street Telephone number: 8 262 019. * Production ( 5 ms ). - T: ask ss to play role , someone is an interviewer someone is a student - T: call ss to practice in front of class - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: practice in pairs. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Ss: practice in pairs. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Listen and write in the exercise book. - Ask them to learn by heart the new - Learn by heart the new structures. structures. - Do exercises 2, 4 on page 10 and 11 in - Ask them to do exercises 2, 4 on page the workbook. 10 and 11 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B 6, 7, 8” - Ask them to prepare the next period “B before going to school 6, 7, 8” before going to school. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 15/9/2012. PERIOD 12. Date of teaching: 18/9/2012- Class 7A-1 19/9/2012- Class 7A-2.

(30) UNIT 2 PERSONAL INFORMATION MY BIRTHDAY(B6,7,8). LESSON 6: B/. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to write invitation card to your friends. + Structure: - What will you give Lan? + Vocabulary: - give (v) tặng - leave (v) đi về - party (n) bữa tiệc - invite (v) mời - join (v) tham dự b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, chalks, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Textand note books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the old lesson ( 5 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: write new structure in the board and answer the questions of the teacher: (?) What’s your date of birth? (?) What’s your address? - answer: My date of birth on March nineteenth. My address is.12 Tran Hung Dao Street. - Remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 2 ms ). - Introduce the lesson by some suggested question: (?)How to invite your friend to come to your party birthday? (?) How to write it? we will study this lesson. Students’ activities. - Listen to the teacher. - Ss write an invitation - Ss: listen..

(31) * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at part 6 on page 26 and answer the teacher’s questions: (?) What are they doing in the picture? (?) what’s Lan doing? - T: introduce new words and grammar. - Ss: Look at and answer =>They are having a birthday party => She’s writing the invitation card - Ss: read and write new words * New word and grammar. give (v) tặng leave (v) đi về party (n) bữa tiệc invite (v) mời join (v) tham dự * Giới từ: - At dùng cho giờ, tuổi + Ngoại lệ: at night, at Christmas... - On dùng cho buổi của 1 ngày trong tuần, ngày - In: dùng cho tháng, năm, mùa, thế kỷ ...; dùng cho buổi trong ngày.. - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions (?)How old is she now? (?) Where does she live? (?) Where is her birthday organized? (?) When will the party start and finish?. - Ss: answer -> She is 12 years old. -> She live at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street -> It’s organized at her home -> It will start at 5 o’clock and finish at 9 o’clock.. * Practice ( 15ms ). - T: ask ss to read the text and complete the the invitation card - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes and give the correct answers.. * Complete this invitation card to Lan’s party. - Ss: read and complete the card. - Ss: answer - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. Dear, Hoa. I am having a birthday party on Sunday, May 25th. The party will be at my house at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street from 5 : 00 to 9 : 00.

(32) - T: ask ss to look at the part 7 on page 27 and imagine you will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party, now write according to these questions - T: ask ss to answer the questions and write. - T: ask ss to read the writing - T correct mistakes and give suggested questions.. * Production ( 8 ms ).. I hope you come and join the fun Love, LAN Tel. 8 674 758 - Ss: listen. - Ss: discuss and write - Ss: read their writing. * Suggested writing. I will go to Ln’s house to join in her birthday party. At Lan’s birthday party I will give Lan a present, it is a white bear. I will get there by motorbike. I will eat a cake, sweet , drink water. I will leaver at 9 o’clock.. - T : guide ss to write the invitation card. - Ss : write - T: call two ss to write on the board - Ss: write - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Listen to the teacher.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask the students to learn by heart the - Learn by heart the new words and new words and write an invitation to write an invitation to their birthday. their birthday. - Ask the students to do exercises 4,5 - Do exercises 4,5 on page 11 and 12 in on page 11 and 12 in the workbook. the workbook. - Ask the students to prepare the next - Prepare the next period “ Unit 3 A1” period “ Unit 3 A1” before going to before going to school. school. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... ==============================.

(33) Date of preparing: 16/9/2012. Date of teaching: 19/9/2012- Class 7A-1 21/9/2012- Class 7A-2. PERIOD 13 UNIT 3 AT HOME LESSON 1: A/ WHAT A LOVELY HOME!(A1) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to express the feeling and describe a house and a room. + Structure: - What + a / an + adj + N ! + Vocabulary: - awful - dryer - sink - tub - refrigerator. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). - Form: oral * Question: write new word in the board. * Answer: - Invite, finish, party, start. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 4 ms ). - Introduce - T: ask ss to play game “Slap the board”. Come in Uncle aunt. - Ss: play game.

(34) See Room. House. Nic e Shop. * Presentation ( 13ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture part 1 on page 29 and answer the question. (?) How many rooms are there in the house? (?) What are they? (?) What are in each room?. - Ss: look at and answer. -> 4 rooms.. -> living room , bedroom, bathroom and kitchen. - T: introduce new words and guide ss to -> Ss: describe read - Ss: listen and read in chorus * New words. tub (n) bồn tắm sink (n) chậu washing machine (n) máy giặt dryer (n) máy sấy dish washer (n) máy rửa bát electric stove (n) bếp điện refrigerator (n)tủ lạnh convenient (adj) tiện lợi comfortable (adj) thoải mái awful (adj) tồi tệ, khủng khiếp amazing (adj) ngạc nhiên. - T: give example and explain about the modern (adj) hiện đại exclamations. Eg1: What a lovely room! - Ss: look at, listen and answer the Eg2: What a hot day! teacher’s question. (?) Which are these sentences? (?) How is it made? - Ss: * Exclamations. ? How does Eg1 have property ? - Ss: ? How does Eg2 have property ? What + a/an + adj + N ! - T: ask ss to find out exclamations in - Ss: Eg1: khen ngợi (Compliment) the dialogue Eg2: phàn nàn (Complain) - T: call some students give out the - Ss: find out exclamations. + Compliment:.

(35) * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to read the dialogue - T: call ss to practice in pairs in front of class - T: correct pronunciation - T: guide ss to read and answer the questions. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes.. * Production( 5 ms ). - T: ask ss to ask and answer about themselves with the question “e, f” - T: call ss to practice in front of class - T: correct if necessary. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. What a lovely living room! What a bright room! What a nice colors! What a beautiful bath room! + Complain: What an awful day! - Ss: read the dialogue - Ss: Practice in pairs - Ss: read and answer the questions - Ss: answer the questions - Ss: Listen and write in their exercise book. * Answer keys. a. Living room, Hoa’s room, bathroom and kitchen, b. Because it is bright and it has a nice colors: pink and white c. A sink, a tub and a shower d. A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a dish washer, and electric stove. e. f. Students’ answers. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - T: ask ss to learn by heart the new - Ss: Listen and remember. words and new structure. - Do exercise 1 on page 13 in the workbook. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise - Prepare the next period “A2,3” before book. going to school. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................

(36) =============================== Date of preparing: 19/9/2012. Date of teaching: 22/9/2012- Class 7A-2 24/9/2012- Class 7A-1. PERIOD 14 UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 2: A/ WHAT A LOVELY HOME!(A2,3) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to use the exclamation fluently and describe the position of the items in the room or house. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - T: Ask ss some questions (?)Where do you live? (?)How many rooms are there in your house/ apartment? (?)What are they? (?)What is in each room? - Ss: Answer the teacher’s questions - T: Remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm – up( 3 ms ). - Introduction - T: ask ss to play game “Net work” - Ss: play game Things in the house? * Presentation ( 5ms ). - T: ask ss to review about exclamation. * Write exclamation..

(37) - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guide ss to make sentence and use the exclamation. - Ss: tell again structure * Structure. What + a/an + adj +N ! - Ss: listen. * Practice( 22 ms ). - T: ask ss to make sentence with complain and compliment - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: answer * Complain. a. What an awful restaurant! b. What a wet day! c. What a boring party! d. What a bad movie! * Compliment a. what a lovely house! b……. - T: ask ss to review structure. - Ss: tell again * Structure. There is/ are….... on/ in ….. Is /Are there…......on /in…? - Yes, there is/ are. - No, there isn’t/ aren’t.. - T: guide ss to look at the picture and describe what have in the picture. - T: ask ss to practice in pairs - T: call ss to practice in the class - T: correct mistakes. * Production( 5 ms ). - T: guide ss to ask and answer the. - Ss: listen - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice * Example. A: What is in the picture? B: there is a table A: Is there a cat ? B: Yes, there is. A: Where is it ? B: It is on the floor - Ss: ask and answer - Ss: practice..

(38) question about which have in the class - T: call ss to practice in the class - T: correct mistakes c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Do the task. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. d. Guide the home work ( 2 ms ). - T: ask ss to make sentences with structures - Do exercise 3,4 on page 13 in the workbook. - Prepare B1,2 for next period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... =============================== Date of preparing: 22/9/2012. Date of teaching: 25/9/2012- Class 7A-1 26/9/2012- Class 7A-2. PERIOD 15 UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 3: B/ HOA’S FAMILY (B1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer about someone’s job. + Structure: + What do/ does + S + do? - S + be + job. + Where do/ does + S + work? + Vocabulary.: - Countryside; grow vegetable; house work ; farm b. Skills - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape..

(39) b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - Form: oral * Question: do ex 4 on the board? * Answer a. house f. kitchen b. clean g. bed room c. garden i. neighbor d. flower h. quite e. living b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up( 3 ms ) - T: we know about Hoa. answer the questions about Hoa (?) Where does she live now? (?) Who does she live with? (?) Where does she come from ? (?) Where does her parents work? What do they do? we will study this lesson. Students’ activities. - Ss: answer -. She lives at 12 Tran Phu street. She live with her family. She come from VN. Her parents work on Their farm.. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture (?)What re they doing? (?) what does woman do at home? - T: introduce new word by situation. - T: ask ss to listen and repeat the new words twice following the teacher. - T: call some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. - T: review structure. (?) What do your parents do? (?) Where do they do?. - Ss: look at and answer the question - Ss: Listen and write down * New words. countryside (n) Nông thôn grow vegetable (v) Trồng rau house work (n) công việc nhà raise cattle (v) chăn, nuôi gia súc - Ss: listen and repeat - Ss: read the words in front of the class. - Ss: listen, answer the teacher’s questions and remember..

(40) What do/ does + S + do? S + be + job Where do/does + S + work? S + work(s) + place. * practice ( 15 ms ).. - T: ask ss to listen to the dialogue - T: ask practice in pairs - T: guide ss to answer the question - T: call ss to answer - T: correct mistakes.. - T: ask ss to look at part 2 and read - T: explain some new words in the text by some suggested questions: 1- (?) What does a doctor do? (?) Where does he/ she work? 2- (?) What does a teacher do? (?) Where does he/ she work? 3- (?) What does a journalist do? (?) Where does he/ she work? -T: Let ss listen and repeat the words twice. - T: guide ss to practice with a partner. - T: call some pairs work in front of the class. - T: Listen and correct if necessary.. - Ss: listen - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: answer - Ss: answer * Answers. a. He is a farmer b. He works on his farm. c. She is a housewife d. She does her house work and helps on the farm. e. Yes, they are ( Because they love working on the farm.) f. She is eight years old. - Ss: read - Ss: listen and write * New words. take care of (v) chăm sóc look after (v) chăm sóc teach (v) dạy học primary school (n) Trường T’H journalist (n) nhà báo - Ss: Listen and repeat. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: work in front of the class. S1: What does her father do? S2: Her father is a doctor S1: where does he work? S2: he work in a hospital ……………………..

(41) * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to ask and answer about themselves. T: call some pairs practice in front of class T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: ask about themselves. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Ss: practice in pairs. d. Guide the home work ( 2 ms ). - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words book. and new structures and make sentences with them - Ask ss to do exercise 1 on page 15 in the work book. - Prepare “B3,4” for next period. - Ask ss to prepare “B3,4” for next period. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... =============================== Date of preparing: 23/9/2012. PERIOD 16. Date of teaching: 26/9/2012- Class 7A-1 28/9/2012- Class 7A-2. UNIT 3: AT HOME LESSON 4: B/ HOA’S FAMILY (B3,4). 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to complete information in the form. + Structure: - have no . + Vocabulary: - have no b. Skills - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson..

(42) 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: write a paragraph about member in your family:(-what they do; - where they work) * Possible answer: My father is a doctor , he works in a hospital. My mother is a nurse, she works in a hospital, too. My sister is a student, she studies in a primary school. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up( 3 ms ). - T: ask students some suggested questions to introduce the new lesson. (?) What’s your name? (?) How old are you? (?) What do you do?. Students’ activities - Ss: answer - My name is ...... - I am ................. - I am a student.. * Pre - listening( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at part 3 and guide ss to match sentences. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes * While - listening( 15ms ). - T: guide ss to listen and complete the form - T: ask ss to listen and complete - T: let ss to listen 3 times. and check again - T: call ss to stand up to answer.. - T: correct mistakes. * Tape transcript. + Tom is a teacher. He is 26 years old and teaches at a high school. + Susan is a journalist. She is 19 and. - Ss: listen and match - Ss: answer * Answer keys. A farmer – works on the farm A doctor – takes care of sick people A journalist –writes for a newspaper A teacher – teaches in a school. - Ss: Listen - Ss: listen and complete - Ss: Check and compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer. * Answer keys..

(43) writes for a magazine. + Bill is 20 and he is a nurse. He works in a hospital.. Name: Tom Age: 26 Job: Teacher Place of work: at a high school. Name: Susan Age: 19 Job: Journalist Place of work: for a magazine. * Post – listening ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to interview their friends and write down. Name: Bill Age: 20 Job: nurse. Name: …………………………. Age: …………………………… Job: …………………………….. Place of work: in a hospital. Place of work: ………………… - T: call some pairs to practice. - T: Listen and correct if necessary. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ).. * About you. - Ss: interview each other Name: Ha Age: 13 Job: Student Place of work: Muong Sai School. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the home work ( 2 ms ).. - Ss: practice.. - Make sentences with structures - Do exercise 2 on page 15 in the work book. - Prepare “B5,6” for next period.. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Do the task. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise.

(44) book. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... =============================== Date of preparing: 26/9/2012. Date of teaching: 29/9/2012-Class 7A-2 1/10/2012 -Class 7A-1. PERIOD 17 UNIT 3 PERSONAL INFORMATION HOA’S FAMILY (B5,6). LESSON 5: B/. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice the comparative and superlative of the adjectives. + Structure: - Comparative Short adjective + “er” More + long adjective - Superlative : The short adjective + “est” The most + long adjective + Vocabulary.. - apartment - empty - suitable. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE..

(45) a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). - Form: oral * Question: practice in ask and answer to complete the form? * Answer: Name: …………………………. Age: …………………………… Job: ……………………………. Place of work: ………………… b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 4 ms ). - T: give examples and ask Ex: Ha is taller than Nam. - Ss: compare Ba is the shortest in our class. Nga is more beautiful than Ngan. Lan is the most beautiful in our class (?) What form sentence is it used? T: How to compare this person/ thing with that person/ thing. we will study this lesson * Presentation( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess (?) Where do you live? (?) Do you like your sandal? why? - T: Where nobody live what are we called? - T: introduce new words by the situations. - T: give some example and explain the comparative and superlative of the adjectives again. Ex: + Hoa is the taller than Nga. - Ss: look at and guess. ->Ss: I live in a house/ an apartment. -> Ss: its suitable with me - Ss: empty - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. apartment (n) căn hộ suitable (adj) hợp, phù hợp empty (adj) trống rỗng - Look at and remember. * Structures + Comparative. Short adjective + “er”.

(46) + This book is more beautiful than that Ex: + This pen is the newest pen. + This machine is the most convenient machine - T: ask ss to look at the text and find out the sentence which is used comparative * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: guide ss to read the text - T: call ss to practice in front of class - T: ask ss to read and answer the qs - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. More + long adjective + Superlative The short adjective + “est” The most + long adjective - Ss: find out. - Ss: read in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: answer the questions - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. * Answer keys. a. The one at number 27 b. The one at number 79. c. The one at number 79 d. The one at number 27 The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it’s the newest of the three apartments . It has two bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a kitchen.. - T: ask ss to look at part 6 on page 36.. - Write. Below is John’s letter to his wife and daughter in the USA. Complete the letter using these words.. (?) What do you see in this part? (?) Why do you know a letter? - T: you will read the letter from John to his wife and daughter and filling word in the spaces - T: call ss to stand up to and answer - T: correct mistakes.. -> Ss: a letter -> Ss: Dear... Love ; Date - Ss: read and complete. * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to compare things have in the. - Ss: answer * Answer keys. 1. beautiful. 2. expensive 3. cheapest 4. small 5. big 6. best - Ss: practice in pairs.

(47) class. - T: call some pairs to practice in front of class. - T: correct mistakes if necessary. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise and structures. book. - Ask ss to do exercises 2,3 on page 15 - Do exercises 2,3 on page 15 and 16 in and 16 in the workbook. the workbook. -Ask ss to prepare the next period - Prepare the next period “Language “Language focus”. focus * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ =============================== Date of preparing: 29/9/2012 PERIOD 18. Date of teaching: 2/10/2012-Class7A-1 3/10/2012Class7A-2 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to review the knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 3 as: The future simple tense; prepositions and ordinal numbers. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson: During the lesson..

(48) b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities *Warm up (5') T asks ss about tense of each sentence: -I lived in Son La. -She is cooking the dinner. -They will play chess. * Presentation and practice (34'). Ex: 1. - T: ask ss to review about the present simple tense. - T: call ss to do exercise 1 on the board. - T: correct. Students’ activities. - Listen to the teacher.. 1. Present simple tense. (+) S + V(s/ es) + O (-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + V + O (?) Do/ Does + S + V ? - Yes, S + do/ does. - No, S + don’t/ doesn’t. - Ss: apply structure to do exercise 1 - Ss: do exercise 1 * Answer keys. a. is – lives – are – goes. b. are – eat – rides – catches. - T: correct.. 2. Future simple tense. - Ss: review (+) S + will + V + O. (-) S + won’t + V + O. (?) Will + S + V + O ? - Yes, S + will. - No, S + won’t. - Ss: do exercise 2 * Answer keys. - Nam will do home work ,but he won’t tidy the yard - He will see a movies but he won’t watch TV . - He won’t meet Minh but he will write to grandmother. Ex: 3.. 3. Ordinal numbers. - Ss: repeat the ordinal numbers.. Ex: 2. - T: ask ss to review future tense. - T: ask ss to apply structure to do exercise 2.. - T: ask ss to repeat the ordinal numbers and the use of it. - T: ask ss to write the correct ordinal numbers.. - Ss: do exercise. - Ss: go to the board to write. * Answer keys..

(49) - T: Call some ss go to the board to write down. - T: Look at and correct if necessary.. Ex: 4. - T: ask ss to review about preposition - T: ask ss to do exercise 4 in pairs. - T: call pairs to stand up to answer - T: correct. Ex: 5. - T: review about comparative. - T: ask ss to give examples. - T: guide ss to do exercise 5.. Soccer team Thang Loi Thanh Cong Tien Phong Doan Ket Hong Ha Phuong Dong Thang Long. Points 26 25 23 29 34 19 36. Position Fourth Fifth Sixth Third Second Seventh First (1). 4. Preposition. - Ss: review. On, in front of, under, behind next to - Ss: do exercise 4 - Ss: answer S1: point at picture b) Where is my cat ? S2: It is in front of the chair . c) It is behind the TV d) It is next to the bookshelf . e) It is on the couch . 5. Adjectives. - Ss: give the structure - Ss: give example * Structures + Comparative. Short adjective + “er” More + long adjective + Superlative The short adjective + “est” The most + long adjective - Ss: do ex5 * Answer keys. a) A is a cheap toy and B is cheaper but C is the cheapest b) A is an expensive dress and B is more expensive dress but B is the most expensive dress. c) A is a good student and B is better student but C is the best student.

(50) Ex: 6. - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What do you say if you want to know one’s job ? - T: explain the way to do - T: let them practice in pairs Example a) S1: He fights fire . He is very brave . What is his job ? S2: He is a fireman . Ex: 7. - T: listen and correct their mistakes - T: review about there is/ are..... - T: call ss to stand up to answer .. - T: correct mistakes Ex: 8. (?) Which question- word did you learn?. - T: guide ss to do exercise 8 in pairs.. - T: Listen and remark if necessary. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ).. d) A is strong and B is stronger but C is the strongest . 6. Occupations - Ss: work in pairs b) S1: She works in a hospital . She makes sick people well What is her job? S2: She is a doctor . c) S1:She works in a school She teaches students . What is her job? S2: She is a teacher . do the same at the end d) He is a farmer 7. Is there a…?/ Are there any...? - Ss: apply to do exercise 7 * Answer keys. a) Are there any books ? Yes , there are b) Are there any armchairs ? No, there aren’t . c) Is there a telephone No, there isn’t d) Are there any flowers Yes , there are 8. Question words. - Ss: answer - What - Where - How - Who - Ss: do exercise 8. * Answer keys. 1. What’s his name? His name’s Pham Trung Hung. 2. How old is he? He is 25 3. Where does he live ? He lives at 34 Nguyen Bieu Street – Hai phong 4. What is his job ? He is an office manager ..

(51) - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 3 ms ). - Ask ss to redo all the exercises in - Ss: listen and write. Language focus 1. - Redo all the exercises in - Ask ss to prepare the next period Languagefocus 1. TEST 45’ - Prepare the next period TEST 45’ * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ =============================== Date of preparing: 1/10/2012 PERIOD 19. Date of teaching: 3/10/2012- Class 7A-1 5/10/2012- Class 7A-2 TEST 45’. 1.OBJECTIVE. - Test their knowledge which have learnt from unit 1 to 3 . 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, chalk… b. Students : Books, pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE . a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional ) b. Teaching the new lesson. 2. THE CONTENT OF THE TEST. MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 45’ Tên Chủ đề (nộidung, chương…) Listening. Nhận biết TNKQ T L (gapfilling) 6 câu x. Thông hiểu TNKQ TL. Vận dụng TN TL KQ. Cộng. 6 câu 1,5 = 15%.

(52) 0.25 = 1.5 đ (True or false) 5 câu x 0,4=2 đ word meaning (multiple choice) 6câu x 0,5= 3đ (Offers) (give the correct form of verbs in brackets) 6 câu x 0,25 = 1,5đ. Reading. Vocabular y. Grammar. Writing. Số câu Số điểm. 6 câu 1,5 điểm= 15%. 18 câu 6,5 điểm=55%. 5 câu 2,0 = 20%. 6 câu 3= 30%. 6 câu 1,5 = 15%. (complete the sentences) 4câu x 0,5 = 2đ 4 câu 2 điểm=20%. 4 câu 2 = 20% 27 câu 100%. TEST:45’ I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (1,5 pts). * Tape transcript Hello, this is my mother. She is thirty – eight years old. She is a nurse. She works in a hospital. My house is far from the hospital so she often goes to work by bus. Her hobby is volleyball and she likes playing volleyball in the afternoon. She goes home at 6 p.m. 1. My mother is ................ A. a nurse 2. She works in .................. A. a school. B. a doctor. C. a teacher. B. a hospital. C. a theater.

(53) 3. She goes to work by .................... A. motorbike B. car C. bus 4. She likes playing ....................... in the afternoon. A. volleyball B. soccer C. tennis 5. She goes home at ..................... A. 5 : 00 B. 6 : 00 C. 7 : 00 6. Her house is ......... from the hospital. A. near B.far C. normal II. Read the passage and tick “” in the box “ T ” or “ F ” to the statements (2pts). This is Mr. Long. He is a teacher. He teaches Math and Physic at Muong Sai Junior High School. He usually gets up at 6 o’clock. The school is far his house so he goes to school by motorbike. His class starts at 7 o’clock and ends at eleven – fifteen. Mr. Toan goes home and has lunch at a quarter to twelve. T F 1. Mr. Toan is a teacher of English. 2. He teaches at Muong Sai Junior High School. 3. He usually goes to school by car. 4. His class starts at 7 : 00 and finishes at 11: 15. 5. He has lunch at 11 : 45. III. Match the words in column A with the phrase words in column B to make completed sentences. (3 pts) A 1. A teacher 2. A farmer 3. A nurse 4. A housewife 5. A student 6. an engineer 1. ............. B a. does the housework. b. teaches the children. c. grows vegetables and raise cattle d. goes to school. e. works in a hospital. j. works in a factory 2. ............. 3. ............ 4. ............ 5. ........... 6. ............. IV. Choose the correct form of the verbs ( 1,5 pts). 1. Her name ...........Hoa. 2. Where ..............you from? 3. I ........From VN. 4. What .........he do? He is a doctor. 5. My sister .........18 years old. 6. She .......be busy tomorrow..

(54) V. Arrange the provided words into the completed sentences. (2 pts) 1. a/ home/ lovely/ !/ What =>......................................................................................................................... 2. will/ to/ go/ Tomorrow/ Ha Noi/ He. => ........................................................................................................................ 3. There/ a/ in/ is/ teacher/ my class. => ......................................................................................................................... 4. likes/ She/ pop music/ to/ listening. => ......................................................................................................................... ANSWER KEYS. TEST: 45’ I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (1,5 pts). 1–A 2–B 3–C 4–A 5–B 6-B Tape transcript Hello, this is my mother. She is thirty – eight years old. She is a nurse. She works in a hospital. My house is far from the hospital so she often goes to work by bus. Her hobby is volleyball and she likes playing volleyball in the afternoon. She goes home at 6 p.m. II. Read the passage and tick “” in the box “ T ” (2pts). T 1 2 3 4 5. or “ F ” to the statements. F .   . III. Each correct sentence is 3 point. 1–b 2–c 3–e.  4–a. IV. Choose the correct form of the verbs ( 1,5 pts).. 5–d. 6-f.

(55) 1. is 2. are 3. am 4. does 5. is 6. will 7. am V. Arrange the provided words into the completed sentences. (2 pts) 1. What a lovely home! 2. He will go to Ha Noi Tomorrow. 3. There is a teacher in my class. 4. She likes listening to pop music. 5. Lan is taller than Nam.. =============================== Date of preparing: 3/10/2012. PERIOD 20. Date of teaching: 6/10/2012- Class 7A-2 8/10/2012- Class 7A-1 CORRECT THE TEST. 1. OBJECTIVE. - Correct the “TEST” for the students how to know their result of the test 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, chalk… b. Students : Books, pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE . a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional ) b. Teaching the new lesson. TEST: 45’ I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (1,5 pts). 1–A 2–B 3–C 4–A.

(56) 5–B 6-B Tape transcript Hello, this is my mother. She is thirty – eight years old. She is a nurse. She works in a hospital. My house is far from the hospital so she often goes to work by bus. Her hobby is volleyball and she likes playing volleyball in the afternoon. She goes home at 6 p.m. II. Read the passage and tick “” in the box “ T ” (2pts). T 1 2 3 4 5. or “ F ” to the statements. F .   . III. Each correct sentence is 3 point. 1–b 2–c 3–e.  4–a. 5–d. 6-f. IV. Choose the correct form of the verbs ( 1,5 pts). 1. is 2. are 3. am 4. does 5. is 6. will V. Arrange the provided words into the completed sentences. (2 pts) 1. What a lovely home! 2. He will go to Ha Noi Tomorrow. 3. There is a teacher in my class. 4. She likes listening to pop music. * REMARK . Knowledge ……………………………………………………………………….... Skill ……………………………………………………………………………....... Decorate ………………………………………………………………………........ Express …………………………………………………………………………......

(57) Date of preparing: 6/10/2012. Date of teaching: 9/10/2012- Class 7A-1 10/10/2012- Class 7A-2. PERIOD 21 UNIT 4 AT SCHOOL 1: A/ SCHEDULES (A1,2,3). LESSON. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer about the time and know the name of the Subjects. + Structure: What time is it ? It’s + time + Vocabulary. - Math, Physic, Physical Education .... b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson: During the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 1ms ). - T: How to ask about the time . we will study this lesson.. - Listen to the teacher.. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: review structure ask about the time - T: give example and explain about it. - Ss: review - Ss: write * Ask and answer about the time. → What time is it? - It is + (time) + o’clock - It’s + minute + past + time number - It’s +..............+ to +...................... * Practice ( 20 ms )..

(58) - T: Let ss listen to the tape about content of p1. - T: now ask and answer about the time (?) What time do you do everyday? (?) What time do you do these things? Ex: What time do you get up ? What time do you go to bed?..... Ex: What time do you get up? - I get up at 5 o’clock - Ss: listen and repeat. - T: guide ss to practice the section 2. - T: call ss to practice in front of class. - Answer about you. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs S1: What time do you get up? S2: I get up at six o’clock. S1: What time do classes start S2: They start at seven o’clock ............................................ - T: guide ss to listen to the section 3 - T: introduce new words in part3. -Listen and write. Complete the schedule. - Ss: listen - Ss: listen and write * New words. Math (n) Toán Music (n) Nhạc History (n) Lịch sử Physics (n) Vật lý Geography (n) Địa lý Physical Education (n) Thể dục Literature (n) Văn học Civic Education (n) GDCD Technology (n) Công nghệ Art (n) Họa Chemistry (n) Hóa - Ss: listen and complete. - T: ask ss to listen and complete missing words in part 3 - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistake. - Ss: answer * Answer Friday. 7 : 00 7 : 50. English Geography. Saturday. 1 : 00. Physical Education. * Tape transcript. Good morning everybody. There are some small changes to your schedule this Friday and Saturday. Please write the correct subjects and times in your book. On Friday, English is at 7 a.m as usual. Then Geography is at 7.50. The next class is Music at 8.40. We start again at. - Ss: practice in pairs.

(59) Music. 8 : 40. 3 : 40. Physics History. 9 : 40 10 : 30. 2 : 40. English Physics. 4 : 30. Math. 9.40 with Physics and our last lesson of the day is History. On Saturday afternoon, the first class is Physical Education at one o’clock and the second class is Math. We have another period of English at 3.40 and Physics is at half past four. Any questions? No? Good. Let’s continue with today’s class..... * Production ( 9 ms ). - T: ask ss to ask and answer “ What time get up ; go to school ; each subject start ; - Ss: practice in pairs go to bed.... - T: call ss to stand up to practice in front - Ss: practice of class - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Listen and remember.. d. Guide the home work ( 2 ms ). - Listen and write in the exercise book. - Ask students to learn by heart the new words and structures. - Ask students to do exercises 1, 2 on page 21 in the workbook. - Ask students to prepare the next period - Prepare the next period “ A4,5 ” “ A4,5 ” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 7/10/2012 Date of teaching: 10/10/2012- Class7A-1 12/10/2012- Class7A-2 PERIOD 22 UNIT 4 AT SCHOOL 2: A/ SCHEDULES (A4,5). LESSON. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer about their subject. + Structure: What time do/does+ S +V? + Vocabulary: Important.

(60) b. Skills - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - Form: oral * Question: do exercise 1 on page 21? * Answer: b. it’s twenty one fifteen c. it’s three nineteen d. it’s nine fifteen e. it’s fifteen forty- five f......... b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up( 3ms). - T: ask ss to play game “Network”. - Ss: play game. Math. English. Music Subjects. History. Physics. * Presentation( 10 ms ) - T: ask ss look at part 4 on page 43 and. - Look at the pictures. Ask and answer questions. - Ss: they are learning - Ss: give examples Ex: I am playing soccer * The present progressive tense. (+) S + am/ is/ are + V- ing (-) S + not am/ is /are + V- ing (?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + V- ing? - Yes, S + am/is/ are..

(61) ask (?) What are they doing? - T: review progressive tense. (?) Are you learning English? (?) What time do you have your English class? - T: review present simple tense. - T: introduce new words by situations. * Practice ( 15ms) - T: ask ss to practice part 4 on page 43 - T: call ss to practice in front of class . - T: guide ss to read the dialogue in p5 - T: call ss to read in front of class - T: correct - T: explain about new structure. * Production ( 8ms ). - T: guide ss to give their schedule in their books - T: guide ss to ask and answer the questions with a partner make the same dialogue. - T: call ss to practice in pairs. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to rewrite the dialogue in the exercise book and write the Schedule. - Ask ss to do exercise 3 on page 22 in the workbook. - Ask ss to prepare the next period “A6,7”. - No, S + not am/is/are. => Yes, I am * The present simple tense. - Ss: review (+) S + V(s/es) + O (-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + V + O (?) Do/Does + S + V + O ? - Yes, S + do/does - No, S + don’t/ doesn’t * New words. important (adj) quan trọng interesting (adj) hay, thú vị - Ss: ask and answer about the pictures - Ss: practice in pairs A. What is Binh doing? B. He is studying geography A. What time does Binh have his geography class? B. He has his Geography class at 10.10. ................................................. - Listen and read. - Ss: read the dialogue - Ss: read - Ss: listen *Ask and about the time with “When” → When do/does + S + V + O...? - Ss: give schedule Mon 7:15 English 8:5 Math Tue Wed Thur Fri Sat - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice - Listen and remember. - Do as the teacher’s request. - Do exercise 3 on page 22 in the.

(62) workbook. - Prepare the next period “A6,7” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ============================. Date of preparing:. Date of teaching: 13/10/2012 -Class7A-2 15/10/2012 -Class7A-1. PERIOD 23 UNIT 4 AT SCHOOL. LESSON 3: A/ SCHEDULES (A6,7). 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer about the time and understand content of the dialogue. + Structure: - Have no + vocabulary: - different from; two 20 minute breaks; - basket ball; baseball ; uniform... b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ) * Question: do exercise 3 on page 22. * Answer b. What’s Trung doing? - He is listening music c. What is Mai doing?.

(63) - She is doing her math d. what’re Hung and Ha doing? - They’re learning English e. ........ b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 2ms ). - T: Ss all over the world have to be went to school (?) What subjects are they learning at school? (?) Are schools in VN different from school in the USA? - T: we will study this lesson * Presentation ( 10ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture in part 6 (?) What are they doing? (?) Which school is it? - T: Introduce new words by situations - T: guide ss to read the text. Students’ activities. - Ss answer the questions.. - Read. -> Ss: They are learning -> Ss: school in the USA - Ss: listen and write * New words. different (adj) khác start (v) bắt đầu finish (v) kết thúc two 20 minute break ra chơi 20 phút uniform (n) đồng phục baseball ( n) bóng chày basketball (n) bóng rổ cafeteria (n) quán ăn tự phục vụ. * Practice ( 15ms ). - T: ask ss to read the text - T: ask ss to read the text and do True or False - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. T a. b.. F.  . * Questions: True or False? Check the boxes. - Ss: read the text. - Ss: read and do “True or False” - Ss: answer. - Ss: write correct answer. * Answer keys..

(64) - Ss: practice in group. - Ss: answer * Compare.. * Production ( 8ms ) - T: ask ss to practice in group and find out the different between school in VN from school in the USA - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - T: ask ss to look at part 7. - T: ask ss to listen and repeat. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ).. VN school. - there is school uniform - classes start at 7.15 - class finish at 11.30 - there are lessons on Saturday -there are 4- five minute breaks. USA school. - there is no school uniform - class start at 8.30 - class finish at 3.30- 4 o’clock - there are not any lessons on Saturday - there are two -20 minute breaks. - Play with words. - Ss: look at - Ss: listen and repeat - Listen and remember. - Do as the teacher’s request. - Listen to the teacher.. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart new words and make sentences with them - Do exercise 4 on page 23 at home - Prepare “B1, 2” for next period. - Ask ss to learn by heart new words and make sentences with them - Do exercise 4 on page 23 at home - Prepare “B1, 2” for next period * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................

(65) ============================. Date of preparing: 13/10/2012. Date of teaching: 16/10/2012-Class7A-1 17/10/2012-Class7A-2. PERIOD 24 UNIT 4 AT SCHOOL B/ THE LIBRARY (B1,2). LESSON 4:. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe position of things there are in the library. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - Question: Read and translate the text in Vietnamese? * Answer: Trường học ở mỹ luôn khác với trường học o VN .thường không mặc đồng phục đến trường............. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up( 2 ms ). (?) Where do you go to borrow book? (?)Which books are there in the library? - T: we will study this lesson. * Presentation.( 10 ms). (?) What do you see in the picture? (?) Where is books ? (?) What books are there in the library?. Students’ activities => Ss: library Ss anwer.. - Listen and read. => Ss: library.

(66) - T: introduce new words by situations. - T: guide ss to read the new words - T: you will listen to a conversation between ss and the librarian she is showing position of the books.. => Ss: it’s on the rack, shelf - Ss: answer - Ss: listen and write * New words. rack (n) giá đỡ shelf (n) giá dictionary (n)Từ điển reference book (n)sách tham khảo library (n) Thư viện librarian (n) người trông coi thư viện science book (n)sách khoa học reader (n) sách đọc thêm - Ss: read new words. * Now answer. * Practice.( 15ms). - T: guide ss to read the dialogue - T: ask ss to read in front of class - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions - T: call ss to stand up to answer .. - T: correct mistakes. - T: introduce content of the dialogue - T: introduce structure by example. - Ss: read the dialogue in chorus - ss: read in pairs - Ss: answer - Ss: answer - Ss: write correct answer * Answer key. a. The magazines are on the racks ( near the science books) b. The newspapers are on the racks ( near the history books) c. The math and science books are on the shelves on the left. d. The history and geography books, dictionaries and literature in Vietnamese are on the shelves on the right. e. The books in English are at the back of the library. f. The library opens at 7 am. g. The library closes at 4.30 pm. - Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: listen - Ss: write * Structure. Where can I find (name’s book),.

(67) please? - Ss: make sentence. - T: ask ss to make sentence with structure - T: guide ss to listen the dialogue - T: ask ss to practice in pairs - T: guide ss ask and answer the questions about the library plan in B1. - T: call some pairs practice their dialogue in front of the class. - T: Listen and correct if necessary.. - Ss: listen - Ss: practice the dialogue - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: Work in front of the class.. * Production( 8 ms). - T: ask ss to make the similar the dialogue. - Ss: practice in pairs. - T: call ss to practice in front of class - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: practice in pairs. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask students to learn by heart the new words and structures. - Ask students to do exercises 1,2 on page 24 and 25 in the workbook. - Ask students to prepare the next period “B3,4”. - Listen and write in their exercise book. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. - Do exercises 1,2 on page 24 and 25 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B3,4”. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ================================ Date of preparing: 14/10/2012 PERIOD 25. Date of teaching: 17/10/2012- Class7A-1 19/10/2012- Class7A-2.

(68) UNIT 4 AT SCHOOL 5: B/ THE LIBRARY (B3,4). LESSON. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe the position of the books in the library and know more about the biggest and largest library in the world. c. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson(5 ms). - T: calls students to go to the board to correct exercise 1 in the workbook. - T: calls on some others to remark. - T: remarks and gets points. *To find books in the library and know the biggest library of the world , we study lesson today(1'). * Answers keys. a–T d–F b–T e–T c–F b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher's activities * Warm – up(3ms). T asks ss: What kinds of books does your school have?. Students' activities -Ss answer.. - T: introduces the content of the lesson. * Presentation (8ms). - T: asks ss to look at the picture of the library and guess the position of the racks - Listen. and shelves of the books in it. Where are they? - Ss: look at the picture and guess..

(69) - T: explains the request of listening.. - Ss: listen. - T: lets ss listen to the tape three times. Then asks them to answer the question: “Where are they"?. Ss do in pairs.. * Practice(16ms ) - T:asks ss to compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: compare the answers with a partner. - T: calls on some students to give their -Ss: give the answers. answers in front of the class. - T: lets ss listen to the tape again and gives the correct answers.. * Answer key. 1. Study area. 2. Science + Math. 3. Geography 4 + 5. Newspapers and magazines. 6 + 7. English. 8. Librarian’s desk.. - T: comes on asking ss to look at the picture of the part 4 on page 49.. - Read. Then answer. - Ss: look at the picture of section 4 on page 49.. - T: asks ss some suggested questions:. - Ss: answer the questions.. (?) Which building is it in the picture? (?) Do you know which the library is in the world ? - T: Introduces: this is the biggest and largest library in the world. - T: introduces and explains some new words in the text.. - T: asks ss to listen and repeat the words three times. - T: calls on some students to read the words again tocheck thei pronunciation - T: asks ss to read the text carefully and answer the questions.. - Ss: listen - Ss: write. * New words. Congress (n) Quốc hội receive (v) nhận contain (v) chứa đựng employee (n) nhân viên - Ss: read the text and answer the questions. - Ss: compare the answers with a partner..

(70) - Ss: read their answers in front of the - T:asks ss to compare their answers with class. a partner. * Answer key. - T: calls on some students to read aloud a. It’s in Washington D.C, the capital of their answers in front of the class. others the USA. listen and remark. b. It has over 100 million books. c. It has about 1,000 km of shelves. d. Over 5,000 people work there. - T: corrects and gives the right answers. e. Because it receives copies of all American books. * Production( 7 ms). - Ss close the their book and retell. - T: asks ss to retell about that library. - Ss: retell. - T: calls ss to stand up to retell . - T: corrects mistakes. - Ss: discuss. - T: asks ss to discuss the question: (?) Which library is the largest in VN? c. Consolidation( 3 ms). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework(2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and translate the passage into Vietnamese. - Ask ss to do exercise 4 in the workbook on page 26. - Ask ss to prepare the next period “Unit 5 A1”.. - Listen to the teacher. - Learn by heart the new words and translate the passage into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 4 in the workbook on page 26. - Prepare the next period “Unit 5 A1”.. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 17/10/2012 PERIOD 26. Date of teaching: 20/10/2012-Class7A-2 22/10/2012-Class7A-1.

(71) UNIT 5 WORK AND PLAY LESSON 1: A/ IN CLASS (A1) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe the work of a student at school. + Structure: - Review the present simple tense. + Vocabulary: - map (n) - interested in (adj) - Computer Science (n) - experiment (n) b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: write new word on the board? *Answer - employee, content, congress, receive........ b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 3 ms ). - T: introduce the lesson by some suggested question: (?) Which subject do you like to learn?. => Ss: My favorite subject is geography. (?) Why? T: introduce new lesson. => Because I study map and learn more about different countries.. * Presentation ( 10ms ). - T: ask s to look at the picture and introduce new words. - Listen and read. - Ss: listen and write * New words begin = start (v) bắt đầu use (v)sử dụng.

(72) - T: guide ss to read in chorus - T: guide ss to read the text * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to read the text silently. - T: guide ss to ask and answer five the questions about Mai - T: ask ss to ask and answer about themselves - T: call ss to stand up to practice . - T: correct mistakes.. Computer Science (n)Tin học interested in (v)quan tâm/ thích map (n) bản đồ experiment (n) thí nghiệm - Ss: read in chorus. - Ss: read * Now ask and answer five questions about Mai. - Ss: read the text - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs S1: What does Mai study in her physic class? S2: She does some experiments S1: Which school does Mai go to? S2: She goes to Quang Trung School. S1: How many days a week does she go to school? S2: She goes to school six days . S1: Which grade is she in ? S2: She is in grade 7. S1: What does she think about Geography. S2: She thinks it is difficult.. * Production( 8ms ). - T: Hang the cardboard with some statements. Then ask ss to check the statement which is True or False about the content of the text. 1. Mai goes to school five days a week 2. Mai likes her Computer Science very much. 3. She does some experiments in Geography. 4. In her Geography, she learns how to use a computer. - T: call two students go to the board to do exercise. Others look at and remark.. - Ss: look at and do - Ss: go to the board to do exercise. * Answers. 1–F 2–T. 3–F. 4–F.

(73) - T: remark and correct if necessary. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words - Learn by heart the new words and and translate the text into Vietnamese. translate the text into Vietnamese. - Ask ss to do exercise 1 on page 27 in - Do exercise 1 on page 27 in the the workbook. workbook. - Ask ss to prepare the next period - Prepare the next period “A2,3” “A2,3” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 20/10/2012. Date of teaching:23/10/2012-Class7A-1 24/10/2012-Class7A-2. PERIOD 27 UNIT 5 WORK AND PLAY LESSON 2: A/ IN CLASS (A2,3) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe about feature of each subject. + Structure - have no + Vocabulary. - fix (v) - light (n).

(74) - house hold(n) - electronics (n). - repair (v). b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). - Form: oral * Question: write new word on the board? * Answer: begin , use , computer, interested in, experiment....... b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 4 ms). - T: ask ss some suggested questions (?) What does Mai learn? (?) What is her favorite subject?. Students’ activities - Ss: Answer => => Her favorite subject is Computer Science.. (?) What does Ba learn? (?) What is his favorite subject? - T: to know we will study this lesson. * Presentation( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the pictures of the part 2 and ask (?) What is he doing in the first picture? (?) What is fixing? (?) What is he good at? (?) What is he doing in the second one? - T: introduce new word. - Read. Then answer the questions. => He is repairing => household appliances => He’s good at fixing things - Ss: listen and write * New words. enjoy (v)thích thú Electronics (n)Mônđiện dân dụng.

(75) fix (v)sửa chữa repair (v)Sửa chữa/ tu sửa light (n) household appliances:trang thiết bị trong gia đình. good at (adj) giỏi về cái gì draw (v) vẽ - T: let ss listen and repeat the new words drawing (n) bức vẽ/ bản vẽ three times. artist (n) họa sĩ/ nghệ sĩ - T: call some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. - Ss: listen and repeat * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to read the text carefully - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions - T: call ss to stand up to answer the questions - T: correct mistakes.. - T: come on asking ss some questions. (?) Do you like math? (?) Is it difficult or easy? - T: ask ss to look at the part 3 - T: introduce the text. - T: ask ss to read the text and answer the questions: (?) How much does one banana cost? - T: introduce new words and guide ss to read. - Ss: read the words again.. - Ss: read the text - Ss: read and answer the questions - Ss: answer * Answers. a. Ba likes Electronic best b. Yes , he does. He enjoys school very much c. He learns to repair household appliances. d. He will be able to fix his own appliances e. Yes, he is. His drawings are very good. f. g. Students’ answers. h. - Read. then answer. How much does one banana cost? - Ss: look at - Ss: listen - Ss: read the text and answer * New words. right (adj) đúng.

(76) - T: ask ss to read and answer - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes - T: ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: call some pairs work in front of the class. - T: listen and correct if necessary. * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to make the same the text by describe their friends in the class. - T: ask ss to read their text - T: correct mistakes.. wrong (adj) sai price (n) giá cả erase (v) xóa cost (v)trị giá problem (n) vấn đề - Ss: read and answer - Ss: answer * Answer. It costs 600 dong.. - Ss. practice in groups - Ss: read - Ss: write correct answer.. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Learn by heart the new words and - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words translate the passage in the part 3 into and translate the passage in the part 3 Vietnamese. into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 2,3 on page 28 in the - Ask ss to do exercises 2,3 on page 28 in workbook. the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A4,5,6”. - Ask ss to prepare the next period “A4,5,6”. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing:21/10/2012. Date of teaching:24/10/2012-Class 7A-1 31/10/2012-Class 7A-2.

(77) PERIOD 28 UNIT 5 WORK AND PLAY LESSON 3: A/ IN CLASS (A4,5,6) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe about subjects in the school b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson (4 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: write new word on the board? - Answer: right, wrong, cost , price...... b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up( 3 ms ). - T: ask ss to play game networks. Music. Art. Literature. English - Ss: play game. SUBJECT History. Physic. Geography. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at part 4 on page 54. - Listen. Then write the correct letters (?) What are they doing? next to the names. (?) Which subject do you like? - T: guide ss to guess What subject do Ba - Ss: guess and Hoa have on Saturday morning?”.

(78) - T: ask ss to listen and match - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes * Tape transcript. On Friday morning, Ba and Hoa go to school. Some of the subjects they do on Saturday are the same, but some of them are different. At seven o’clock, Ba has Technology and Hoa has Computer Science. These classes last for two periods. At 8.40, Ba has Geography. Hoa does not have Geography on Saturday. She has Physical Education instead. In the last period, They have the same class. Hoa and Ba both have class activities then.. - Ss: listen and match - Ss: answer * Answer key. Ba: d, a, e. Hoa: c, b, e.. * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What do you learn in each subject? (?) Which subject do you like or dislike? (?) Why? - T: introduce new word by situations.. - Read. - Ss: answer - Ss: listen and read * New words. author (n) tác giả important (adj) quan trọng temperature (n) nhiệt độ graph (n) đồ thị , biểu đồ equation (n) công thức, phương trình calculator (n) máy tính atlas (n) bản đồ globe(n) quả địa cầu. - Ss: look at and read scanning. - T: ask ss to look at the text and guide ss to read the text. - Ss: answer (?) What do you learn in literature? (?) What.............................history? (?) What............................physic? (?)......................................geography? - Ss: practice in groups - T: we have 4 names of subjects in accordance with relevant words each subject you find out irrelevant word and odd it out. - Ss: answer.

(79) - T. call ss to stance up to answer - T: correct mistakes.. * Answer key. Literature - painting History: - basketball games Science : - preposition English: - England - Match each subject to the correct items. - Ss: look at part 6 - Ss: practice in groups - Ss: answer * Answer key. - Physical: -> running , game, ..... - Geography: -> map, globe..... - Music: -> piano, guitar.... - Art: -> paint , pencil... - Math: -> graph, equation..... * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at part 6 - T: guide ss to match - T: call s to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: listen and remember. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and do as the teacher requests.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ) - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words. - Do exercises in the workbook of section A - Prepare the next period “B1,2” before going to school. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 26/10/2012. Date of teaching: 29/10/2012-Class7A-1 2/10/2012-Class7A-2. PERIOD 29 UNIT 5 WORK AND PLAY LESSON 3: B/ IT’S TIME FOR RECESS (B1,2).

(80) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe about activities at the recess. + Structure: - Present progressive + vocabulary.- bell, ring, recess, chatting, blind man’s bluff, catch, marble, skipping rope... b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). - Form: - Question: write new word in the paper? * Answer: author, temperature, graph, equation, calculator, atlas, globe...... b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up( 4 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions and introduce the content of the lesson. (?) What do you do at the recess? (?) What else? - T: to know we will study this lesson * Presentation( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess. (?) What are they doing? - T: introduce new word by situations. (?) How the activities are happening?. - Ss: play game, talking....... - Listen and read. - Ss: answer - Ss: listen and read - Ss: activities are happening.

(81) (?) Which tense have they used in the lesson? (?) Can you find out those sentences which used present progressives? Ex: many are talking about the last class - T: introduce structure by example. * New words. - chat (v) nói chuyện phiếm, tán ngẫu - marble (n) hòn bi - skip rope (v) nhảy dây - catch (v) - blind man’s bluff (n) bịt mắt bắt dê - bell (n) cái chuông - ring (v) kêu - recess (n) giờ ra chơi - Ss: present progressives * New structure. Present progressives tense. → S+ tobe + V-ing +........ * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the text and guide ss to read the text. - T: ask ss to ask and answer the about the pictures - T: Call some pairs practice in front of the class. - T: listen and correct if necessary.. - T: ask ss to practice part(b) ask and answer about themselves. - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes. * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at part 2 on page 57 - T: guide ss to listen to the tape - T: ask ss to listen and match - T: ask ss to stand up to answer. - Now work with a partner. Ask and answer questions about the students in the picture. - Ss: answer and ask A: what is this boy doing? B: he is playing marble. b. Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: answer and practice in pairs A: What do you do at the recess? B: I play marble A: Do you talk with your friends? B: yes, I do - Listen. Match each name to an activitiy. - Ss: look at - Ss: listen - Ss: listen and match - Ss: answer * Answers. - Mai is playing catch - Kien is playing marble.

(82) - Lan is skipping rope - Ba is playing blind man’s bluff c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. - Do exercise 1 on page 30 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ B3,4,5*” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ================================== Date of preparing: 28/10/2012. Date of teaching: 30/10/2012-Class7A-1 3/11/2012-Class7A-2. PERIOD 30 UNIT 5 WORK AND PLAY LESSON 3: B/ IT’S TIME FOR RECESS (B3,4,5) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to talk about / know more about the American students’ activities at recess. + Structure: - have no + vocabulary. - pen pal, take part in, scoring goals, shoot, energetic....... b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school..

(83) 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: write new word on the board? * Answer: chat, skip rope, play marble, catch, ..... b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up( 3 ms ). - T: ask students: (?) What do you do at the recess? - T: What about American students? What do they do at the recess? - T: to know we will study this lesson * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess (?) What are they doing? - T: introduce new word by situations.. - T: Let ss listen and repeat the new words three times and then call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. - T: introduce content of the text. Students’ activities. - Ss: play game, talking....... - Read. Then answer the questions.. - Ss: answer - Ss: listen and read * New words. pen pal (n) bạn qua thư take part in (v): tham gia energetic (n)hiếu động, năng nổ portable(adj) có thể mang theo score goals (v) ghi bàn: shoot some hoop (v) ném vòng swap (v) đổi, trao đổi Junior High School (n) THCS Senior High School (n) THPT earphone (n) tai nghe - Ss: listen and repeat.. - Ss: listen * Practic ( 15 ms ).. - T: ask ss to look at the text and guide ss to read the text. - Ss: read the text - T: call ss to stand to read the text.

(84) - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions. - T: ask them to compare their answer with a partner. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - Ss: read - Ss: answer - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer * Answer the questions. a. C b. A c. D d. D. * Production( 8 ms ). - Take a survey.. Catch. . Skip rope. . Marble Read. . . - T: ask ss to look at the completed. Talk. . ACTIVITY. Soccer. . . NAME. Nam. Hoa. Binh. - T: ask ss to look at the section 4 and explain the request of it. - T: ask ss to do exercise in pairs. - T: go around the class to help the students if necessary. - T: Have ss complete the table in their exercise book. - T: Call on some students to read their survey form in front of the class. - T: listen, remark and correct if necessary..

(85) c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and translate the text into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 2,3 on page 32 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ UNIT 6: A1” before going to school. * Teacher’s experence:. . Other. survey form and work in pairs. - T: call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - T: listen and remark.. - Ss: work in pairs. S1: What do you usually do at recess? S2: I usually play marbles. S1: Do you play soccer? S2: Yes, I do. ...................................................... - Ss: listen an remember.. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book.. Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... ================================ Date of preparing: 29/10/2012. Date of teaching: 31/11/2012 -Class7A-1 7/11/2012 -Class7A-2. PERIOD 31 UNIT 6 AFTER SCHOOL LESSON 1: A/ WHAT DO YOU DO? (A1) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to give the request, offers and invitation. + Structure: - Should.........? - Why don’t you........? - Let’s......... + Vocabulary: - relax (v) giải trí b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening..

(86) c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: Match the English words in column A with their Vietnamese meanings in column B. A 1. play soccer 2. play basketball 3. play catch 4. play blind man’s bluff 5. skip rope. B a. nhảy dây b. chơi bóng đá c. chơi bóng rổ d. chơi đuổi bắt e. chơi bịt mắt bắt dê. * Answers 1–b 2–c 3–d 4–e 5–a b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up( 3 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions to introduce the content of the lesson: (?) What are you doing? (?) What do you do after school? (?) Do you play tennis?. Students’ activities - Ss: listen and answer => I’m listening to the teacher => I play soccer, volleyball.... => No, I’m not.. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess (?) What are they doing? (?) Which sport do you like?. - Listen. Then practice with a partner.. - T: how to give the way to play suitable for everyone.. - Ss: tennis, badminton, soccer, volleyball........ - Ss: answer.

(87) Ex: A: let’s play volleyball B: Why don’t we play tennis? C: We should play badminton - T: introduce new structures by situations. - Ss: listen and read * Structure. Gợi ý làm việc gì đó. - T: come on introducing some new words - T: introduce content of the text * Practice ( 16 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the dialogue and guide ss to listen and read the dialogue. - T: call ss to stand to read the dialogue. - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - Let’s + V + O........ - Why don’t+ S + O ...? - S + should + V +O ... * New words relax (v) giải trí, nghỉ ngơi invite (v) mời - Ss: listen - Ss: listen and read the dialogue. - Ss: read - Ss: answer - Ss: answer * Answers. a. She is doing her math homework b. They are going to get a cold drink. c. He is in music room. d. He is learning to play the guitar. e. he usually meets his friends. f. She likes playing volleyball.. c. Production ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to make the same the dialogue with friends in the class. - T: ask ss to read their dialogue - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss. practice in pairs. - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and new structures. Write 5 sentences about after – school activities.. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book.. - ss: read.

(88) - Do exercise 1 on page 33 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A2” before going to school. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 3/11/2012. Date of teaching: 6/11/2012 - Class7A-1 10/11/2012- Class7A-2. PERIOD 32 UNIT 6 AFTER SCHOOL LESSON 2: A/ WHAT DO YOU DO? (A2) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe/ talk about the after – schools activities with the adverbs of frequency. + Structure: - How often.......? + Vocabulary. - adverb of frequency b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school..

(89) 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - Question: Write the new structures in the last period. - T: remark and get points. * Answers - Let’s + V + O........ - Why don’t+ S + O ...? - S + should + V +O ... b. Teaching the new lesson Teacher’s activities * Warm – up( 3 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What do you play after school? (?) How often do you play them? - T: Today, we’ll review the adverbs of frequency. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess: (?) What are they doing?. Students’ activities - Ss: answer => I play soccer and volleyball. => I usually play them.. - Practice with a partner.. - T: introduce new structure by situations. => They are studying and reading in the - T: introduce adverb of frequency and library. review present progressive tense - Ss: listen and read * Structure.. * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to write some sentences about activities after school - T: go around the class to help the students if necessary. - T: call some students give the names of. + How often + do/ does + S + V? - S + usually + V(s/es) + O. sometimes often never always * Trang từ chỉ tần xuất : - thường đứng trước động từ thường và sau động từ “To be” - Look at these activities. Label the pictures. - Ss: write..

(90) the activities and others listen and correct. - T: correct and give the right answers.. - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions with structure “How often” - T: call ss to stand to practice - T: correct mistakes. * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to talk about their activities after school - T: call ss to stand to practice - T: correct mistakes. .. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: give the right answers * Answers. 1. Reading/ Studying in the library 2. Swimming in the pool. 3. Playing computer games. 4. Going to see the movie theater. 5. Playing soccer 6. Watching T.V - Ask and answer. - Ss: ask and answer - Ss: practice S1: What do you usually do after school? S2: On Monday, I usually do my homework. On Wednesday, I sometimes play chess. .......... - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice S1: What do you do after school? S2: I play video games. S1: How often do you play it? S2: I often play it. ........................................ - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to write five sentences about the after – school activities using the adverbs - Write five sentences about the after – of frequency. school activities using the adverbs of - Ask ss to prepare the next period frequency. “A3,4,5” - Prepare the next period “A3,4,5” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... ================================.

(91) Date of preparing: 4/11/2012. Date of teaching: 7/11/2012 - Class7A-1 14/11/2012- Class7A-2. PERIOD 33 UNIT 6 AFTER SCHOOL WHAT DO YOU DO? (A3,4,5). LESSON 3: A/. 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe about the after - school activities. + Structure: - have no . + Vocabulary. - rehearse(v)diễn tập - play (n) vở kịch - anniversary(n) lễ kỷ niệm - comic (n) trruyện tranh - sporty (adj) ham mê thể thao - president (n) Hiệu trưởng/ chủ tịch b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - T: call ss go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions: (?) What do you do after school? (?) How often do you play soccer? (?) Do you always go out ? ........................................................... - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. - T: remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 3 ms ). - T: introduce: In the last period you have. Students’ activities.

(92) learnt the words which describing after – school activities. Now you look at the section 3 and guess What the people in the picture are doing: * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess: (?) What are they doing? - T: introduce new structure by situations and pictures.. - T: guide ss to read new words - T: ask ss to read in single - T: introduce content of the text. - Read. Then answer. - Ss: they are rehearsing the play - Ss: listen and read * New words rehearse(v) diễn tập president (n)Hiệu trưởng/chủ tịch anniversary(n) lễ kỷ niệm play (n) vở kịch comic (n) trruyện tranh pastime (n) sự giải trí sporty (adj) ham mê thể thao - Ss: read in chorus - Ss: read in single - Ss: listen. * Practice ( 18 ms ). - T: ask ss to read the text - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions. - T: call ss to stand to answer - T: correct mistakes. - T: ask ss to look at part 4 and guide ss to listen and match - T: ask ss to listen 3 times and match - T: call ss to stand to answer - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: read. - Ss: ask and answer - Ss: answer * Answers a. Her groups is rehearsing a play for school anniversary celebration. b. He gets American stamps from Liz, his American friend. c. The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday afternoon. d. Nam never plays games. - Listen. Match each name to an activity. - Ss: listen - Ss: listen and match - Ss: answer * Answers..

(93) Mai Nam Ba Lan Kien * Production ( 5 ms ). - T: ask ss to talk about their hobbies after school. - T: call ss to stand to practice - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - go to the school cafeteria. - rehearse a play. - go to the circus. - tidy the classroom. - watch a movie.. - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: practice. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words - Ss: listen and write down in the exercise and read the text again and translate it book. into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 3,4 on page 34 and 35 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1” before going to school. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... ================================ Date of preparing: 5/11/2012. Date of teaching: 8/11/2012 Class7A-1 16/11/2012 Class7A-2. PERIOD 34 UNIT 6 AFTER SCHOOL LESSON 4: B/ LET’S GO!(B1) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to talk about what they should do in the free time. + Structure - should do some things + Vocabulary. - assignment.

(94) b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). * Question: write new words on the board? * Answer. rehearse, anniversary, comic...... b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 4 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What do you do in the free time? (?) What about playing video game? - T: Ba, Lan, Hoa what they do in the free time. Let’s study this lesson. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess: (?) What are they doing? - T: review structure by situations and ask ss to find out sentences which used structures suggest. Students’ activities => Ss: I listen to music, go to the movies, watch TV..... => Ss: Yes - Ss: listen. - T: introduce content of the text. - Ss: They are listening to music - Ss: listen and find out * Structure. Gợi ý làm gì đó… - What about +V-ing......? - Why don’t you +V.....? - Let’s + V....... - great I’d love to - I’m sorry - assignment = exercise - Ss: listen. * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to listen to the text. - Ss: listen and read..

(95) - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions - T: call ss to stand to answer - T: correct mistakes. * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to make the same the dialogue - T: call ss to stand to practice - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: ask and answer - Ss: answer * Answers. a. Nam wants to go to the movies. b. Lan doesn’t want to go to the movies because there aren’t any good movies at the moment. c. Lan wants to listen to some music at her house. d. Hoa doesn’t want to go to Lan’s house because she has too many assignments. e. It’s Saturday. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice. - Ss: remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the structures - Learn by heart the structures and make and make sentences with them. sentences with them. - Ask ss to do exercise 1 on page 36 in - Do exercise 1 on page 36 in the the workbook. workbook. -bAsk ss to prepare the next period “ - Prepare the next period “ A2”. A2”. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... ================================ Date of preparing: 10/11/2012. Date of teaching: 13/11/2012 Class7A-1 17/11/2012 Class7A-2. PERIOD 35 UNIT 6 : AFTER SCHOOL LESSON 5: B/ LET’S GO!(B2) 1.OBJECTIVE..

(96) a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to talk about thíngs which amrecan teenager like to do in the free time. + Vocabulary: - teenager (n) - Youth (n) - scout (n) - guide (n) - instrument (n) - leisure (n) + Structure: have no b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - Form: oral *Question: do exercise 1 on page 36? * Answer. a. What about going to the library? - It’s a great idea, I’d love to b. Let’s go to the zoo - I’m sorry, I’m busy c. Why don’t we go to the canteen? - It’s a good idea........ b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 2 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What do you do in the free time? (?) Which activities should teenagers do? - Ss: - help old people (?) What else? - watch TV..... - T: now we discuss about them * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the pictures and guess (?) What are they doing? - T: introduce content of the text - T: explain about scouts, guide and introduce some new words in the lesson.. - Ss: they are listening to music - Ss: listen - Ss: listen and write * New words. scouts =boy scout = nam hướng đạo sinh guide =girl guide = Nữ hướng đạo sinh.

(97) - T: let s listen and repeat the new words twice. - T: call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to read the text - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions (?) Which of the activities in the list for American teenagers do you think are popular among for VN teenager? (?) Are there many kind of entertainment for teenagers in VN? (?) What are they? (?) What organization are there for teenagers in Viet Nam? (?) Are they similar to Scouts and Guides in Western countries?. →Tổ chức này nhằm cho hội viên những kỹ năng thực tiễn và XD nhân cách. teenager (n) thanh thiếu niên instrument (n) dụng cụ (âm nhạc) Youth (n) Thanh niên - Ss: listen and repeat the words. - Ss: read the words again.. - Ss: listen and read - Ss: ask and answer - Ss: watch TV , listen to music.... * Answer the questions. - watch TV, listen to music, go to the movies , help old people. - go fishing, play sport, play game... - there are organization such as young pioneer or different kind of clubs for children. * Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to discuss in groups of 4 people (?) Think about activities which teenagers do after school? (?) Which you like best? - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the top ten activities in America and compare with the activities in Viet Nam.. - Ss: discuss and choose 5 activities. - Ss: answer. - Ss: listen and remember. - Ss: listen and write down in the exercise book..

(98) - Do exercise 4 in the workbook on page 38 and 39. - prepare the next period “B3,4”. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 11/11/2012. Date of teaching: 14/11/2012 Class7A-1 21/11/2012 Class7A-2. PERIOD 36 UNIT 6 AFTER SCHOOL LESSON 6: B/ LET’S GO!(B3,4) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to invite their friends to do St with them. + Structure: + Would you like to + V...........? - acceptance: Yes, I’d love to. - refusal: I’d love to, but ....... Sorry, I can’t ......... + Vocabulary: - elderly (adj) lớn tuổi, cao tuổi. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: listening and reading. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette and tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). - T: call ss go to the board to give the activities which American teenagers do. - Ss: answer: ................ - T: call on some others listen and remark..

(99) - T: Remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up( 4 ms ). - T: ask students some suggested - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions questions: (?) When is your date of birth? => it is 19-3 (?) Do you invite your friends to join? (?) => Yes, I do How can you invite them in English? - T: to know we will study this lesson * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: Let ss listen to the part B3 twice. - T: review structures by some examples: Ex: - would you like a cup of tea? - would you like to come to my house? - will you join us?. - T: introduce content of the text. * Practice ( 18 ms ). - T: ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.. - Listen. Then practice with a partner. Make similar dialogues - Ss: listen to the tape. - Ss: review * Structure. + Would you like to + do + smt? - Yes, I’d love to. - I’m sorry I busy + Would you like + N? + Will you + V + O..? - Thanks, I can’t ...... - Sorry, I can’t....... - I’d love to but ...... - Ss: listen - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: work in front of class. - T: ask ss to read and make the same the - Read. Then discuss. dialogue. - T: call on some pairs to work in front of the class. - T: correct mistakes - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) Do you usually do voluntary works?.

(100) What are they? (?) Do you know what kind of the voluntary works American children often do to help the community? - T: ask ss to read quickly the passage once. - T: introduce and explain some new words in the text.. - T: listen and repeat the words three times. - T: ask ss to look at “ Class discussion” and answer the question “ How do some teenagers help the community?” with the content of the text. - T: call on some students to answer the questions. - T: come on asking the students to answer question b: How do Vietnamese teenagers help the community? - T: go around the class to help the students if necessary. - T: call on some students to talk about their discussion in front of the class. - T: remark and correct if necessary.. - Ss: answer. - Ss: read the passage quickly. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. community service (n) Hđ giúp đỡ cộng đồng campaign (n) chiến dịch/ cuộc vận động. elderly(adj) lớn tuổi/ cao tuổi. - Ss: listen and repeat the new words three times. - Ss: look at the section “Class discussion”. - Ss: answer the questions. - Ss: answer the question. - Ss: talk about their discussion.. * Production( 5 ms ). - T: ask ss to do exercise “True or False” 1. The young students are doing community service 2. Some young people work as hospital volunteers 3. They are called candy stripers. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: answer. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember.. => T => T => T.

(101) d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Rewrite and learn by heart the new structures and the new words. - Do exercise 2,3 on page 37 and 38 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ Language focus 2”.. - Ask ss to rewrite and learn by heart the new structures and the new words. - Ask ss to do exercise 2,3 on page 37 and 38 in the workbook. -Ask ss to prepare the next period “ Language focus 2”. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 11/11/2012 PERIOD 37 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge.. Date of teaching: 12/11/2012 Class7E,7C,7D 13/11/2012 Class7A,7B LANGUAGE FOCUS 2.

(102) - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to review the knowledge and apply the knowledge to do exercise. + Structure - Present progressive - Making suggestion - Adverb of frequency + Vocabulary. - have no.... b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson: During the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 1 m). - T: introduce the content of the lesson. Students’ activities - Listen to the teacher.. * Pactice ( 39 ms ). - T: ask ss to repeat the form and the usage of the present progressive tense. - T: ask ss to do exercise 1. - T: ask ss to compare their answers with a partner. - T: call on some students give their answers - T: listen and correct if necessary. - T: come on explaining the use of demonstrative adjectives or pronouns again quickly. - T: have ss do exercise 2. - T: let ss compare their answers with a. 1. Present progressive tense. Complete the passage. * Answers. is doing is writing is reading is cooking are playing is kicking is running. 2. This and that, these and those. Complete the dialogue..

(103) partner. - T: call on some students to go to the board to give their result. - T: correct and give the right answers.. * Answer keys. a. This is room is very untidy. Sorry, Mom. b. Put this bag away. That isn’t my bag, Mom. This is my bag. c. Put those dirty socks washing basket. These socks? No, those socks on the bed. d. Throw away those comics. But I like these comics, Mom.. - T: come on asking ss to look at the pictures and write the correct time. - T: call on some pairs to work in front of the class. - T: listen and correct if necessary.. 3. Time. Write the correct time. * Answers. a. It’s nine forty. It’s twenty to ten. b. It starts at a quarter past seven. It starts at seven fifteen. c. No. I’ll be home at half past ten. No. I’ll be home at ten thirty. d. Yes, Miss Lien. I’ll come at six forty-five. Yes, Miss Lien. I’ll come at a quarter to seven. 4. Vocabulary: Subjects. Write the correct subject names.. - T: explain the request of the exercise 4 “ Write the correct subject names. - T: call on some students go to the board to write and others look at the board and * Answers. remark. a. Physical Education. - T: correct and give the correct answers. b. Chemistry. c. Math. d. Geography. e. English. f. History. - T: repeat the use of adverbs of frequency. - T: ask ss to write sentences about Ba. - T: call on some students to go to the board to write and others look at the board and remark.. 5. Adverbs of frequency. Write the sentences about Ba. * Answers. Ba seldom rides a bike to school. Ba always practices the guitar after school..

(104) - T: correct and give the right answers.. - T: ask ss to read the dialogue and then ask ss to write down possible dialogue. - T: ask ss to practice their dialogues in pairs.. Ba usually does his homework in the evening. Ba sometimes plays computer games. 6. Making suggestions. Write down possible dialogues. * Answer. A: Let’s play volleyball. B: Ok. C: Would you like to watch movies? D: I’d love to. E: Should we play soccer? F: I’m sorry, I can’t. G: Would you like to come to my house? H: I’m sorry, I can’t.. c. Consolidation ( 3 ms ). - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to review all the knowledge of - Review all the knowledge of Language Language focus 2 by doing the exercises focus 2 by doing the exercises of it again of it again. - Prepare the next period “TEST 45’” - Prepare the next period “TEST 45’” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 11/11/2012 PERIOD 38 1.OBJECTIVE.. Date of teaching: 13/11/2012- Class 7D,7E 14/11/2012- Class 7A,7B,7C TEST 45’.

(105) - Test their knowledge which have learnt from unit 4 to 6. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, chalk… b. Students : Books, pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE . a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional ) b. the content of the test. MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 45’ Tên Chủ đề (nộidung, chương…) Listening. Nhận biết TNKQ T L. Thông hiểu TNKQ TL. (gapfilling) 6 câu x 0.25 = 1.5 đ. Vocabular y. Grammar. Writing 6 câu 1,5 điểm= 15%. Cộng. 6 câu 1,5 = 15% (True or false) 5 câu x 0,4=2 đ word meaning (multiple choice) 6câu x 0,5= 3đ (Offers) (give the correct form of verbs in brackets) 6 câu x 0,25 = 1,5đ. Reading. Số câu Số điểm. Vận dụng TN TL KQ. 17câu 6,5 điểm=65%. 5 câu 2,0 = 20%. 6 câu 3= 30%. 6câu 1,5 = 15%. (complete the sentences) 4 câu x 0,5 = 2đ 4 câu 2 điểm=20%. 4 câu 2 = 20% 27 câu 100%.

(106) WRITING TEST ON ENGLISH §Ò 1 I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (1,5pts). 1. Hoan studies at_________. A. Muong Sai Primary School B. Muong sai Junior High School. C. Chieng Khuong Senior High School. 2. She lives in __________ in Na Ho Village. A. a house B. a flat C. an apartment 3. She usually gets up at_____________ . A. 5.40 B. 5.45 C. 5.50 4. She _______________ at 6.40. A. has breakfast. B. goes to school. C. brush her teeth. 5. She likes______ in the mountains with her friends. A. walking B. playing soccer C. running 6. She gets up usually at …… A. 5.50 B. 6.50 C. 6.45 II. Read the passage then answer the questions below. (2 pts) Nam is a student in class 7A. He goes to school six days a week. Today, he has 5 periods. He has classes from 7.30 to 11.45. At recess he plays blind man’s bluff with some friends. After school, he sometimes plays soccer and helps his parents. He is interested in Geography because he likes the people and countries all over the world. 1. Which class is Nam in? ................................................................................................................................. 2. What does he do at recess? ................................................................................................................................. 3. Does he helps his parent after school ................................................................................................................................. 4. How often does he play soccer? ................................................................................................................................. 5. Why is he interested in Geography? ................................................................................................................................. III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B. (3 pts) A 1. What do you usually do at recess? 2. What sports do you like playing?. B a. Yes, I do. b. I’m sorry. I’m busy now..

(107) 3. Would you like to go to the movies with us? 4. Do you know how to use a computer? 5. When do you have English classes? 6. What is Hoa doing? 1. ______. 2.______. 3. ______. c. On Tuesday and Friday. d. I usually talk with my friends e. Badminton f. She is watching TV.. 4. _______ 5. _________. 6. _________. VI.Choose the correct form of the verbs. 1. I ………………….( sit ) in the canteen now. 2. She ……………. ( go ) to Ha Noi tomorrow. 3. She …….( listen ) to music. 4. They ……..( be ) usually late for school. 5. We ………..( have ) a lot of cakes. 6. She ……..( traval ) around the world. V. Rewrite these sentences. Put the frequency expressions in brackets into the right places. (2 pts). 1. Ha is interested in stamps. (always) ………………………………………………………… 2. Nga rehearses a play with her friends. (often) …………………………………………………………. 3. Nam and Hang do their homework together. (usually) …………………………………………………………. 4. I go fishing on Sunday. (never) ………………………………………………………….. WRITING TEST ON ENGLISH §Ò 2 I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (1,5pts). 1. Hoa studies at_________. A. Muong Sai Primary School B. Muong sai Junior High School. C. Chieng Cang Senior High School. 2. He lives in __________ in Na Ho Village. A. a house B. a flat C. an apartment.

(108) 3. Tuan usually gets up at_____________ . A. 5.40 B. 5.45 C. 5.50 4. Toan _______________ at 6.40. A. has breakfast. B. goes to school. C. brush her teeth. 5. Lan likes______ in the mountains with her friends. A. walking B. playing soccer C. running 6. She gets up usually at …… A. 5.50 B. 6.50 C. 6.45 II. Read the passage then answer the questions below. (2 pts) Ba is a student in class 7A. He goes to school six days a week. Today, he has 5 periods. He has classes from 7.30 to 11.45. At recess he plays blind man’s bluff with some friends. After school, he sometimes plays soccer and helps his parents. He is interested in Geography because he likes the people and countries all over the world. 1. Which class is Ba in? ................................................................................................................................. 2. What does he do at recess? ................................................................................................................................. 3. Does he helps his parent after school ................................................................................................................................. 4. How often does he play soccer? ................................................................................................................................. 5. Why is he interested in Geography? ................................................................................................................................. III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B. (3 pts) A 1. What do you usually do at recess? 2. What sports do you like playing? 3. Would you like to go to the movies with us? 4. Do you know how to use a computer? 5. When do you have English classes? 6. What is Hoa doing? 1. ______. 2.______. 3. ______. B a. Yes, I do. b. I’m sorry. I’m busy now. c. On Tuesday and Friday. d. I usually talk with my friends e. Badminton f. She is watching TV.. 4. _______ 5. _________. VI.Choose the correct form of the verbs. 1. I ………………….( sit ) in the canteen now. 2. Hoa ……………. ( go ) to Ha Noi tomorrow.. 6. _________.

(109) 3. Lan …….( listen ) to music. 4. They ……..( be ) usually late for school. 5. We ………..( have ) a lot of cakes. 6. She ……..( traval ) around the world. V. Rewrite these sentences. Put the frequency expressions in brackets into the right places. (2 pts). 1. Ha is interested in stamps. (always) ………………………………………………………… 2. Nga rehearses a play with her friends. (often) …………………………………………………………. 3. Nam and Hang do their homework together. (usually) …………………………………………………………. 4. I go fishing on Sunday. (never) …………………………………………………………. 3. ANSWERS. WRITING TEST ON ENGLISH I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (1,5pts). 1. B. 2. A. 3. C. 4. B. 5. A. 6.A. Tape transcript. Hello, my name is Hoan. I’m a student. I study at Muong Sai Junior High School. My family lives in a house in Na Ho Village. I usually get up at 5.50 and go to school at 6.40. In my free time, I like walking in the mountains with my friends. II. Read the passage then answer the questions below. (2 pts) 1. He is in class 7A. 2. He plays blind man’s bluff with some friends. 3. Yes, he does. 4. He sometimes plays soccer. 5. Because, he likes the people and countries all over the world. III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B. (3 pts) 1–d 2–e 3–b.

(110) 4–a 5–c VI.Choose the correct form of the verbs ( 1,5 pts ). a. am sitting b. is going c. listens d. are e. have f. travals V. Rewrite these sentences. Put the frequency expressions in brackets into the right places. (2 pts). 1. Ha is always interested in stamps. 2. Nga often rehearses a play with her friends. 3. Nam and Hang usually do their homework together. 4. I never go fishing on Sunday. =========================== Date of preparing: 12/11/2012 PERIOD 39. Date of teaching: 14/11/2012- Class7D,7E 17/11/2012- Class7A,7B,7C CORRECT THE TEST. 1. OBJECTIVE. - Correct the “TEST” for the students how to know their result of the test 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, chalk… b. Students : Books, pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE . a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional ) b. Teaching the new lesson. I. Listen to the passage and choose the best answer ( A, B or C) to complete the sentences. (1,5pts). 1. B 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. A.

(111) Tape transcript. Hello, my name is Hoan. I’m a student. I study at Muong Sai Junior High School. My family lives in a house in Na Ho Village. I usually get up at 5.50 and go to school at 6.40. In my free time, I like walking in the mountains with my friends. II. Read the passage then answer the questions below. (2 pts) 1. He is in class 7A. 2. He plays blind man’s bluff with some friends. 3. Yes, he does. 4. He sometimes plays soccer. 5. Because, he likes the people and countries all over the world. III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B. (3 pts) 1–d 2–e 3–b 4–a 5–c VI.Choose the correct form of the verbs ( 1,5 pts ). a. am sitting b. is going c. listens d. are e. have f. travals V. Rewrite these sentences. Put the frequency expressions in brackets into the right places. (2 pts). 1. Ha is always interested in stamps. 2. Nga often rehearses a play with her friends. 3. Nam and Hang usually do their homework together. 4. I never go fishing on Sunday. 4. REMARK. - Knowledge: ............................................................................................................. ………………………………………………………………………………………. - Skills: ........................................................................................................................ ..................................................................................................................................... - Decorate: ....................................................................................................................

(112) ..................................................................................................................................... - Express: .................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ======================== Date of preparing: 18/11/2012. Date of teaching: 24/11/2012- Class 7E,7C,7D 25/11/2012- Class 7A,7B. PERIOD 40 UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK LESSON 1: A/ A STUDENT’S WORK (A1) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to talk about the activities and the work of a student. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - T: call ss go to the board answer the teacher’s questions: (?) What do you usually do after school? (?) Which subjects do you have today? (?) What do you like doing in your free time? - Ss: go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions. - T: remark and get points b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 3 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What time do you go to school? (?) What time do your classes start and finish? (?) For how many hours a day do you do. - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions..

(113) your homework? - T: introduce “this lesson, we’ll hear a dialogue between about Hoa and her Uncle about the schoolwork. * Presentation ( 10ms ). - T: Let ss listen to the dialogue once. - T: ask ss to note What Hoa says about the schoolwork and her summer vacation. - T: ask ss: (?) What can you hear about Hoa? - T: let ss listen to the dialogue and look at the textbook. - T: introduce some new words - T: let ss listen and repeat the new words three times. - T: call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation.. - Ss: listen. - Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: listen to the dialogue once.. * New words. - vacation (n) kỳ nghỉ - during (adv) trong khi - last (v) kéo dài - hard (adj) chăm chỉ, vất vả. * Practice ( 18 ms ). - T: Ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - T: come on asking ss to look at the section “Now answer” and read quickly the questions from “a” to “d” - T: have ss read the dialogue again to answer the questions. - T: ask ss to compare their answers with a partner. - T: call some students answer the question in front of the class. - T: listen, remark and correct if necessary.. * Now answer. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ss: work in front of the class. - Ss: read the questions and answer them.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. * Answer keys. a. Hoa’s classes start at 7 o’clock. b. They finish at a quarter past eleven. c. Hoa does her homework 2 hours a day. d. She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation..

(114) e. f. g. c. Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to do exercise “True or False” 1. Her class start at eight o’clock 2. they finish ta twelve o’clock. 3. she does her homework in the afternoon 4. She will help her parents on the farm.. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes - Repeat the content of the lesson.. students’ answers.. - Ss: do exercise. - Ss: answer 1. F 2. F. 3. T. 4. T. - Ss: listen and remember. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and reread the dialogue again and then - Ss: do as the teacher’ requests. translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 3 in the workbook on page 44. - Prepare the next period “A2,3” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... =========================== Date of preparing: 18/11/2012 PERIOD 41. Date of teaching: 20/11/2012- Class 7A,7D 21/11/2012-Class 7C, 7E,7B. UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK LESSON 2: A/ A STUDENT’S WORK (A2,3) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the of the lesson, Students will be able to know more about the vacation in the USA and Viet Nam. b. Skills. - Improve the reading and listening skills. c. Education. - Enjoy the subject very much. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, cassette, tape. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school..

(115) 3. PROCEDURE. a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - T: call ss go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions: (?) What will Hoa do during her vacation? (?) What will you do during your vacation? (?) How often do you visit your parents during the vacation? - Ss: go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions. - Remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 3 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What vacation do you know in Viet Nam and The USA? (?) What do you usually do on those vacations? - T: In this lesson, we’ll know more about the vacations in Viet Nam also America.. - Ss: answer the questions.. - Ss: listen.. * Presentation ( 10 ). - T: ask ss to look at the section A2 and introduce “ This is a letter from USA (Tim sent to Hoa). Now you read quickly it and tell me Who writes and who receives. (?) In your opinion, What is the letter about? - T: Introduce and explain some new words and group words.. - Read. Then answer the questions.. => It’s about the Celebrations in the USA. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. hear (v) nghe thấy few -> fewer (n) ít -> ít hơn Tet holiday (n) kỳ nghỉ Tết Celebrate (v) kỷ niệm Easter (n) lễ phục sinh Thanksgiving (n) lễ tạ ơn Christmas (n) lễ giáng sinh.

(116) - T: let ss listen and repeat the new words - Ss: listen and repeat. three times and the call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. * Practice ( 18 ms ). - T: Ask ss to read the letter again carefully and answer the questions in “Questions” - T: let ss compare their answers with a partner. - T: call on some students to answer the questions in front of the class. - T: remark, correct and give the correct answers.. - T: come on explain the request of the section A3. - T: ask ss to look at the pictures and guess the pictures which describing Celebrations in America.. * Questions. - Ss: read the letter again and answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answer with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. a. Summer vacation is the largest in America. b. During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family. c. Vietnamese students have fewer vacation than American students. - Listen. Write the name of the public holiday in each of these picture. - Ss: listen.. - Ss: look at the pictures - T: let ss listen to the tape three times * New words and ask ss to do exercise. - firework display (v)bắn pháo hoa - T: have ss compare their answers with a - public holiday (n) ngày lễ partner. - Ss: listen and do exercise. - T: call on some students to give their answers. - Ss: compare their answers with a - T: correct and give the right answers. partner. Tape transcript - Ss: give their answers. Tim enjoys all the public holiday. * Answer keys. At Christmas, he always gets a lot of a. Thank giving. gifts. Thank giving is an important b. Independence Day. celebration and there is always Turkeys c. New Year’s Eve. and a lot of good food. d. Christmas. In Tim’s hometown, there is always a large firework display on Independence Day. Tim likes New Year because he can stay up until midnight and celebrate with.

(117) his parents. c.Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to tell about their holiday which they know - T: ask ss to discuss about big holiday in Viet N am - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words in the lesson. - Do exercises 2,4 on page 43 and 44 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A4”. - Ss: may day , Tet holiday, ... - Ss: discuss - Ss: answer - Ss: listen and remember. - Write in the exercise book.. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 18/11/2012. Date of teaching: 21/11/2012- Class7D,7E 24/11/2012- Class7A,7B,7C. PERIOD 42 UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK LESSON 3: A/ A STUDENT’S WORK (A4) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to understand deeply about the student’s work and know how many hours students work a week. + Vocabulary: - typical (adj) - keen (adj) - review (v) - definitely (adv) + Structures . - Comparative adjective: Less , fewer , more b. Skills. - Improve students’ reading skill. c. Education. - Educate students read English correctly and fluently.

(118) 2.PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - T: call some students go to the board to write the name of the celebration and the vacations in America and Viet Nam in the last period. - Ss: go to the board to write. Ex: - Thanksgiving - Christmas - Independence Day - New Year Day ................................... - T: remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm - up( 3 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) What do you do everyday? (?) Is your work at school hard or Ok? (?) How many hours a day do you study? (?) Do you have to do a lot of - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. homework? - T: Introduce “ in this period You’ll read a passage about Hoa Who is a student in - Ss: listen. grade 7 in Viet Nam and How does she study? * Pre - reading ( 10 ms). - T: ask ss to read the passage quickly - Read. Then answer the questions. and give the main idea of it. - Ss: read the passage quickly. - T: repeat the structure “ Comparative of nouns” * Structure + fewer ...... than .......... - T: introduce some new words in the + more ....... than .......... passage. * New words. - T: let ss listen and repeat the new words take a look (v) nhìn vào three times. typical (adj) điẻn hình, tiêu biểu - T: call on some students to read the keen (adj) hăng hái, sôi nổi..

(119) words again to check their pronunciation. * While - reading ( 15 ms ). - T: let ss read the passage carefully and answer the questions. - T: Have ss compare their answers with a partner. - T: call on some students to answer the questions in front of the class and others listen and remark. - T: listen, remark and correct if necessary.. review (v) ôn tập definitely (adv) chắc chắn. * Questions. - Ss: read the passage carefully and answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: write in their exercise book. * Answer keys. a) People think students have an easy life because they only work a few hours a day and have long vocation. b) Hoa works 20 hours a week . It is fewer than most workers’ work . c) Students’ answer. d) No, The writer doesn’t think students are lazy.. * Post- reading ( 8 ms ). - T: give an exercise True/ False. - T: Call some students read the passage aloud and do exercise choose T or F. a) All people think students have an easy life. b) Students have to work hard at school and at home . c) Hoa isn’t a keen students and she doesn’t study hard . d) Hoa always works 45 hours a week. - T: Let students about 5 minutes - T: Call some students give their answers . - T: correct and give right.. - Ss: look at the exercise “T or F” - Ss: read the exercise.. - Ss: do exercise. - Ss: give the answers. - Ss: listen and correct. * Answers. a) F b) T c) F d) F.

(120) c. Production ( 3 ms ). - T ask ss discuss in groups about their study following outline: number of periods,number of study hours.. - Ss discuss in groups: We study 4 -5 periods a day. We study 8- 10 hours a day.. - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss; listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and translate the passage into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1 on page 43 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1”. - Ss: write in the exercise book.. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ Date of preparing: 25/11/2012 PERIOD 43. Date of teaching: 26/11/2012- Class 7E,7C,7D 27/11/2012 Class 7A,7B UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK LESSON 4: B/ THE WORKER (B1). 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe the work of a housewife and a mechanic. b. Skills. - Improve the listening and reading skills. c. Education. - Educate ss love the subject. 2.PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, tape and cassette. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - T: call some students go to the board to tell their work at school and at home. - Ss: go to the board to do as the teacher requests. - T: remark and get points b. Teaching the new lesson..

(121) Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up( 3 ms ). - T: introduce the content of the lesson by some suggested questions. (?) How many people are there in your family? - Ss: listen and answer. (?) What is your father’s job? mother brother - T: Today, we will study about Tim’s family. * Pre – reading ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and guess the content of the lesson. - T: introduce new words by some situations.. - T: guide ss to read new words - T: introduce content of the letter and guide ss to read * While – reading ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to read the letter - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: look at the picture and guess. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. part - time (adj) bán thời gian local (adj) thuộc về địa phương. homeless (adj) không nhà cửa machine (n) máy móc mechanic (n) thợ cơ khí, thợ máy. shift (n) ca day off (n) ngày nghỉ golf (n) môn gôn prefer (v) thích hơn. - Ss: read in chorus and in single - Ss: listen. - Ss: listen and read - Ss. practice in pairs - Ss: answer in front of class * Answer the questions. a. Mrs. Jones works at home, but three mornings a week, she works.

(122) part-time at a local supermarket b. She cooks lunch for homeless people one a week c. Mr. Jones is a mechanic, he repairs machines in a factory. d. He works about 40hours a week. e. The Jones family always go to Florida on vacation. They have great time there. * Answer True or False. * Post – reading ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to do exercise True or False. 1. There are four people in Tim’s family? 2. Tim’s father prefers the morning shift 3. Tim’s father often plays golf in the - Ss: answer afternoon. 4. Tim’s mother works part time at a local supermarket. 1. T 2. T 3. F - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes.. 4. T. c. Production ( 3 ms ). - Ss do the task. - T ask ss retell the Hoa and Tim’s father ‘s works. - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ss: write in the exercise book - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and translate the letter again into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1 on page 44 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B2,3 * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ =============================== Date of preparing: 25/11/2012. Date of teaching: 27/11/2012- Class7D,7E.

(123) 28/11/2012- Class7A,7B,7C PERIOD 44 UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK WORKER (B2,3,). LESSON 5: B/ THE. 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to describe the work of the farmer and compare the farmer’s work with other’s work. b. Skills. - Improve the reading and listening. c. Education. - Help ss enjoy the subject very much. 2. PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, tape and cassette. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: write new words on the board? * Answer. - take care of. - mechanic. - shift - day off - prefer - T: remark and get points b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 4ms ). - T: introduce the new lesson by some questions. (?) Do you remember about Hoa, (?) What does her farther do? (?) What does farmer do? - T: to know we will study this lesson. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and. Students’ activities.

(124) guess - T: introduce new word by situations - T: guide ss to read new words. - T: introduce content of the text and guide ss to read * Practice ( 16ms ). - T: ask ss to read the text - T: ask ss to read and get information about Mr Tuan. - T: guide ss to read the letter and the text about Mr Tuan then make note about them - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - Read. - Ss: look at the picture - Ss: listen - Ss: read in chorus and in single * New words. buffalo (n) con trâu pig (n) con lợn feed (v) cho ăn chicken coop (n) chuồng gà buffalo shed (n) chuồng trâu crop (n) mùa màng animal (n) động vật collect (v) thu lượm, thu nhặt rest (v) nghỉ ngơi - Ss: listen - Compare. - Ss: read - Ss. read and get information. - Ss: practice in groups - Ss: answer in front of class. Day off. vacation time. Mr.Jones 40. two. a threeweek summer vacation. Mr.Tuan 84. four or five times a year. No real vacation. Name. c. Production ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the section B4 and explain the request of the lesson. - T: let ss listen to the tape twice or three times and then have ss fill the information in the table. - T: ask ss to compare their answers with a partner. - T: call on some students to go to the. Hours per week. - Listen and take notes. - Ss: listen to the teacher..

(125) board to fill the information in the table. Others look at and remark. - T: let ss listen to the tape at last and give the correct information. Tape transcript. Peter is a doctor in a hospital. He is on duty for 70 hours a week. He has four weeks vacation each year. Susan is a nurse. She is on duty for 50 hours a week. She has three weeks’ vacation a year. Jane is a shop assistant. She works 35 hours a week. She has one week’s vacation. Phong is a factory worker. He works 48 hours a week. He has an annual vacation of two weeks. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and translate the section B2 into Vietnamese. - Do exercises on page 45 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “UNIT: A1,2”. - Ss: listen to the tape - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: go to the board to fill in the table. - Ss: listen and write the correct information. Hours Amount Name Job per of week vacation four Peter doctor 70 weeks three Susan nurse 50 weeks shop one Jane 35 assistant week factory two Phong 48 worker weeks. - Ss: listen and remember.. - Ss: write in the exercise book. Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 25/11/2012. Date of teaching: 28/11/2012-Class7D,7E 01/12 /2012-Class 7A,7B,7C. PERIOD 45 UNIT 8: PLACES LESSON 1: A/ ASKING THE WAY (A1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge..

(126) - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to know how to ask the way give directions.. and. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: listening and speaking. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, tape and cassette. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - T: call ss go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions. (?) What does your father do? (?) How many hours a week does he work? (?) How many vacations a year does he have? - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. - T: remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 3ms ). - T: introduce the new lesson.. Students’ activities - Ss: listen.. * Presentation ( 15 ms ). - Ask ss to look at the buildings in the section A1 and name the places. - T: call some students read the name of the places. Others listen and remark. - T: listen and remark. Then give the correct answers. - T: ask ss to read the name of the places again.. - Name the places. - Ss: look at the pictures and name the places. - Ss: read the name of the places. - Ss: listen and give the correct answers. * Answers. a. National Bank of Viet Nam (in Ha Noi) b. Saint Paul Hospital. (in Viet Nam) c. Hotel. (in Ha Noi) d. The central post office. e. Ha Noi Railway Station. f. Dong Xuan Market..

(127) - T: ask ss to look at the picture in the section A2. - T: ask ss some suggested questions: (?) Who are they? (?) Where are they? (?) What does the tourist want? - T: introduce the content of the lesson which asking the way and give the directions. - T: let ss listen to the tape once. - T: introduce the new structure which asking and answering about the way. - T: let ss listen and repeat the structure threes times.. * Practice ( 13 ms ).. - Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue with a partner. - Ss: look at the pictures. - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions.. - Ss: listen. - Ss: listen. * New structure. Could you tell me the way how to get.? Could you show me the way to..........? go straight ahead (v) Đi thẳng take the second (v) rẽ vào đ thứ 2 on the left/ the right turn left/ right. - T: ask ss listen and repeat the section A2 three times. - T: ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ss: listen and repeat the section A2. - T: call on some pairs to work in front of the class. - Ss: practice in pairs. - T: listen, remark and correct if necessary. - Ss: work in front of the class. c. Production ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to ask and answer about the way from the school to their house. - T: call on some pairs to practice before the class. - T: listen and remark. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and structure. - Do exercise 1 on page 47 and 48 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A3”. - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: work in front of the class. - Ss: listen and correct. - Ss: listen and remember. - Ss: write in the exercise book.

(128) * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... =================================== Date of preparing: 02/12/2012. Date of teaching: 03/12/2012 Class: 7E,7C,7D 04/12/2012 Class: 7B,7A. PERIOD 46 UNIT 8: PLACES 2: A/ ASKING THE WAY (A3). LESSON. 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to ask about the way to a place. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skill: speaking. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 3 ms ) - Form: oral - Question: write structure on the board? * Answer : + Can you tell me the way to .........? + Can you tell me how to get .........? - go straight a head. - take the first street on the left . - T: remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities.. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 4 ms ). - T: ask ss to play game slap the board. - Ss: play game Bank. Hospital.

(129) Hotel. Post office Shoes store. Museum Market * Presentation ( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to review about structures - T: guide ss to ask and answer about these places in the table.. Book. -. Look at this street map. Practice the dialogue with a partner. - Ss: review - Ss: listen. * Practice ( 17 ms ). - T: ask ss to practice in pairs as example. - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes - T: ask ss to look at the map again. listen and write the places - T: ask ss to listen and write - T: ask ss to listen again and check - T: call ss to stand up to answer. - T: correct mistakes. c. Production ( 11 ms ). - T: ask ss to base on the map and describe a place , other guess which place - T: call s to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes. * Tape transcript. 1. Go straight ahead to the second street. Turn left. What is on the right? 2. Go straight ahead. Turn right into the first street. What is on the left next to the restaurant? 3. What is on your left?. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs - Ss: practice in front of class - Ss: listen - Ss: listen and check - Ss: answer in front of class Ex: S1: Where is police station? S2: The police station is between the post office and the museum. It’s opposite the station. ....................................................... * Listen and write places. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs * Answers. 1. Souvenir shop 2. Shoe store.

(130) 4. Go to the second street. Turn right. What is opposite the hotel? 5. What is on your right?. 3. Hotel. 4. Drug store 5. Bank. - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the structures - Ss: write down in the exercise book. - Write describe the way from their house to the school. - Prepare the next period “A4,5”. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:........................................................................................................... ============================ Date of preparing: 02/12/2012. Date of teaching: 05/12/2012 Class: 7D,7E 06/12/2012 Class : 7A,7B,7C. PERIOD 47 UNIT 8: PLACES ASKING THE WAY (A4,5). LESSON 3: A/. 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer distance of two places. + Structure: - How far is it from _____ to _____ ? - It’s (about) _____ km/m. + Vocabulary. - have no b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, tape and cassette. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE.

(131) a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - T: call some students go to the board to describe the way from their house to school. - Ss write - T: listen and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm – up ( 3 ms ). - T: ask ss some suggested questions to introduce the content of the lesson. (?) Where do you live? (?) How far is it from your house to school. - Ss: listen and answer the teacher’s - T: Today, we’ll learn more about asking questions. and answering about the distance between two points. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the example Example: + How far is it form Muong Sai to Son La? - It’s about 65 km. + How far is it form Son La to Ha Noi? - It’s about 335 km.. 4. Listen and repeat. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: look at the examples.. - T: introduce structure by situations and examples - T: guide ss to read the structure and give examples.. * Practice ( 15 ms ). - T: let ss listen and repeat the dialogue twice. - T: ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: call ss to stand up to practice. - Ss: listen and write. * Structure. - How far is it from....to......? - It is about ..........km/m - Ss: give examples Ex: S1: How far is it from Muong Sai to Chieng Khuong? S2: It is about 12 km.

(132) - T: correct mistakes if necessary. - Ss: listen and repeat. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs - T: ask ss to look at the table and map. Then ask and answer about distance between two places. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. - Ss: practice in front of class 5. Look at this table of distances in km. Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Ss: ask and answer in pairs - Ss: answer in front of class S1: How far is it from HN to Vinh? S2: It’s about 319 km. S1: How far is it from HN to Hue? S2: It’s about 688 km. .............................................. c. Production (11ms ) - T: ask ss to ask and answer the real situations - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes if necessary. - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs S1: How far is it from your house to school? S2: It’s about 3 km. ................................................... d. Guide the homework. ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the structures. - Do exercises in the section A in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1,2” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................

(133) Date of preparing:. Date of teaching: 7. PERIOD 48 UNIT 8: PLACES LESSON 4: B/ AT THE POST OFFICE (B1,2) 1.OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer the price of some things at the post office. + Structure: - How much............? + Vocabulary. - envelope(n) - send(v) - change (v) - altogether (adv) .............. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading and listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2.PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, tape and cassette. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 4 ms ). - Form: oral - Question: write new structure on the board? - Answer the question: (?) How far is it from your house to school? * Answer: - How far is it from.........to...... - it about ..........km = It’s about 2 km. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm - up ( 1 m ). - T: ask ss some questions to introduce the content of the lesson. (?) Have you ever sent the letter? (?) How much is a stamp for a letter?. Students’ activities - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. => Yes, I have. => It’s 8.00 dong..

(134) - T: How to ask and answer about the price we will study this lesson. * Presentation ( 10ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture. (?) Where are they ? (?) What thing does the girl take? (?) What for? - T: introduce new words and structures by situations and picture Ex: - How much is it? - How much are they? - How much does it cost? - How much do they cost? Ex: I’d like to buy some envelope. 1. Listen and read. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: look at and answer: => They are in the post office. => She takes an envelope => send a letter. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. envelope: (n) phong bì send: (v) gửi receive: (v) nhận altogether : (adj) Tổng cộng, tất cả change: (n) tiền lẻ, tiền thừa cost: (v) trị giá * Structure: How much is it/ are they? It’s......../ They’are........... How much does/ do + S + cost? S + cost(s)................ - T: guide ss to read new words. - T: let ss listen and repeat the dialogue twice. * Practice ( 20 ms ) - T: ask ss to practice in pairs - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes - T: ask ss to read the dialogue again and answer the questions. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. + I ‘d like to + V + N - Ss: read - Ss: listen.. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs - Ss: practice in front of class - Ss: read and answer the questions - Ss: answer in front of class * Answer keys. a. Liz will mail the letter to the USA b. She pays 11.500d altogether c. She receives 3.500d in change. d. Students’ answers e..

(135) 2. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: look at the picture and answer. - T: ask ss to look at the picture and ask. (?) Where are they going? (?) What do they go for? - T: introduce new words by situations and picture. - T: guide ss to read new words. - T: guide ss to read the dialogue. - T: ask ss to practice in pairs - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes - T: ask ss to read the dialogue again and answer the questions. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. c. Production( 8 ms ). - T: ask ss to make the same dialogue. - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the new words and read two dialogues and translate them into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1,2 on page 50 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B3,4,5” * Teacher’s experence:. => They are going to the post office => They send letter and buy envelope - Ss: listen and write. * New words. - phone card (n) Thẻ điện thoại - oversea mail (n) thư quốc tế - local stamp (n)tem trong nước - regularly (adv) thường xuyên - Ss: read - Ss: listen. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs - Ss: practice in front of class - Ss: read and answer the questions - Ss: answer in front of class * Answer keys. a. Hoa needs some local stamps, some stamps for oversea mail and a phone card. b. She needs some stamps for oversea mail because She has a pen pal in American. c. She needs a phone card to call her parents. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: listen and remember. - Ss: write in the exercise book..

(136) Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ===========================. Date of preparing:. Date of teaching: 7. PERIOD 49 UNIT 8: PLACES LESSON5: B/ AT THE POST OFFICE (B3,4,5) 1.OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to understand the dialogue ask and answer about the price..

(137) b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2.PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, pictures or posters, textbook, tape and cassette. b. Students: Books, pens; preparing the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). - T: call ss go to the board to correct exercise 2 on page 50 and 51 in the workbook. Ss: answer: S1: How much is the phone card? S2 - It’s 10.000dong. ....................................................... - T: listen, remark and get points. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm - up ( 2 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the book and introduce the content of the lesson. * Presentation ( 10 ms ). - T: ask ss to look at the picture and ask. (?) Where are they going? (?) What do they do? - T: ask ss to review structure. - T: introduce content of the dialogue - T: guide ss to complete the dialogue.. * Practice ( 15 ms ). - Task ss to complete the dialogue - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes.. Students’ activities. 3. Complete the dialogue. Then make up similar dialogues; use the words in the box. => They are in the post office. => They send letter and buy envelope - Ss: review. Ex: How much is it?=> It’s......... How much are they?+> They’re....... - Ss: listen - Ss: listen. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs - Ss: practice in front of class * Answers..

(138) - T: ask ss to look at part 4 - T: ask ss to listen and write the price of each these five items. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes * Tape transcript. Mrs. Robinson goes to the stationery store and buys a packet of envelopes at 2.000 dong and a pen 1.500 dong. She also buys a writing pad at 3.000 dong. Then she goes to the post office and buys five stamps at 500 dong each and a 50.000 phone card. add up how much Mrs. Robinson spends altogether. c. Production ( 11 ms ). - T: ask ss to ask answer the questions in part 5. - T: call ss to practice asking and answering about the questions - T: correct mistakes.. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to do exercise 3 in the text book “Make up similar dialogues” - Do exercises in the work book. - Prepare the next period “Review”. 1. like 2. are 3. much 4. is 5 here 6. change 4. Listen and write the price of each of these five items. - Ss: look at - Ss: listen and write - Ss: answer in front of class * Answers. a. The total cost is 59.000dong. including: + a packet of envelopes: 2000 dong. + a pen: 1.500 dong. + a writing pad: 3.000 dong. + five stamps: 2.500 dong. + a phone card: 50.000 dong. b. She will have 1000d in change. 5. Answer the following questions. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs * Answers a. It’s1500d b. It’s 9500d c. It’s 800d d. Yes, I do, it’s my friends. - Ss: listen and remember. - Ss: write in the exercise book.. * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ===========================.

(139) Date of preparing: PERIOD 50. Date of teaching: 7 REVIEW “THE PRESENT SIMPLE TENSE”. 1. OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to review the use and the form of the present simple tense: “To be and the ordinary verbs” b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, listening, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss know to use language accurately. 2. TEACHING AIDS a. Teacher: Teaching plan, referent book and readers. b. Students: student’s book. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson: Durin the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities * Warm – up ( 2 ms ). - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. Students’ activities - Ss: listen. * Presentation ( 15 ms ). - T: ask ss to repeat the form and use of the present simple tense of the verb “To be” - T: remark and give some exercise for them to do them to do:. 1. Present simple tense of the verb “To be” - Ss: repeat the form and use of it. “To be” Thì, Là, ở - am - is - are (+) I am........ = I’m....... He/ She/ It is ........ = he’s We/ You/ They are....... = We’re (-) I am not....... He/ She/ It is not/ isn’t.............

(140) We/You/ They are not/ aren’t........ (?) + Am I ........... ? - Yes, you are - No, you aren’t + Is he/ she/ it ........? - Yes, S is. - No, S isn’t. + Are we/you/ they ....? - Yes, S are. - No, S aren’t. Wh + am/ is /are + S ..........? S + am/ is/ are ......................... * Practice ( 15 ms ). 2. Practice. Exercise 1: Put am/ is /are into the gaps Exercise 1. in the statements. 1. I........ fine, thank you. 1. am 2. He ..........twenty years old. 2. is 3. My name ............ Nga. 3. is 4. Lan and Nam........... 10 years old. 4. are 5. It .......... a ruler. 5. is. Exercise 2: Put am not/ isn’t/ aren’t in the gaps in the sentences.. Exercise2.. 1. He .............. Ba. He is Ha. 2. I............ 12 years lod. 3. She ............. from Ha Noi. 4. They ............... 23 years old. 5. Nga and Ba ............... students.. 1. isn’t 2. am not 3. isn’t 4. aren’t 5. aren’t. Exercise 3. Put am/ is /are in the gaps in the questions. 1. .............. he a student? - Yes, he........ 2. ................ they Lan and Hang? - No, they ......... not. 3. ................. I 12 years old? - No, you......... not. 4. ................. Lan and Nam students? - Yes, they........... Exercise 3. 1. Is is 2. Are are 3. Am are 4. Are are.

(141) 5. ................. she Hoa? - Yes, she............. 5. Is is. Exercise 4 Put am/ is/ are in the gaps in the questions. 1. How .......... she? She .......... fine, thank you. 2. How old ....... you? I ....... 13 years old. 3. What .......... your name? My name ........ Mai. 4. What ............. his name? His name ............ Ba. 5. What ......... this? It ....... an eraser.. Exercise 4. 1. is is 2. are am 3. is is 4. is is 5. is is. c. Production ( 11 ms ). Exercise 5. Exercise 5. Choose the best answer ( A, B or C)to complete the sentences. 1. I ......... Lee. A. is B. am C. are 1–B 2. My name ........ Na. A. are B. am C. is 2–C 3. How ........... you? A. am B. are. C. is 3–B. 4. How old ....... you? A. are B. is. C. am 4–A. 5. What ............. her name? A. are B. am C. is 5–C - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework ( 2 ms ). - Ask ss to learn by heart the form and use of the present simple tense of “To be” - Do some exercise in the workbook.. - Listen to the teacher. - Do the task..

(142) - Prepare the next period “ Review the present simple tense of “Ordinary verb” * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ===========================. Date of preparing:. Date of teaching: 7. PERIOD 51 REVIEW “THE PRESENT SIMPLE TENSE” ( Continuous) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson: ss will be able to understand clearly the present simple by doing some exercises. b. Skill. - 4 skills. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, the referent books. b. Students: Prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ) ? Call ss go to the board to correct exercise given the last period. * Answers. 1. am. 2. is. 3. are. 4. is. 5. are. 6. are. b. Teaching the new lesson..

(143) Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. * Warm up ( 5 ms ). - T: ask ss to repeat the form of ordinary verb. - T: remark and give the right form.. * Practice ( 23 ms ).. 1. Ordinary verb. * Form S + V( S, ES) + I, you, we, they : V. + He, she, it : VS, ES 2. Practice.. - T: give some exercises using the ordinary verb. Peter(1)…….. ( wake up) at 7 o’clock 1. but he(2)…………( not/ get up) until 2. 7.15. He(3)…….. (have) a shower and(4) 3. ………(get dressed). Before breakfast 4. he(5)……….. (clean) his teeth. He(6) 5. ……… (leave) the house at 8 o’clock 6. and(7)……. (catch) the 8.15 train to 7. Manchester. On the train he reads the 8. newspaper and(8)…….. (do) the 9. crossword. He(9)…….. (come) home at 10. about 6.30. After dinner, he(10)…….. 11. (wash up). Then he usually (11)……… (watch) TV. He(12)…….. (go to bed) at about 11.30.. Exercise 1: Put the verbs in brackets in to the correct form in the following text. wakes up doesn’t get up. has. gets dressed. cleans. leaves. catches. does. comes. washes up. watches. 12. goes to bed. 1. I ....... in O village. (live). Exercise 2: Choose the correct form of the verbs in bracket to complete these sentences. - live.. 2. He ........ to go out with me. (want). - wants.. 3. Lan and Mai ..... the movies. (like). - like..

(144) 4. ........ he ...... shopping every week? (go). - Does ; go. - goes.. 5.He ...... to school at eight. (go) - get. 6. They ...... up at seven. (get) - brushes. 7. She ....... her teeth every morning. ( brush) - has. 8. My school ....... two floors. (have) - washes. 9. He ...... his face. ( wash) - go. 10. I .... to bed at 11 o’clock. (go) Exercise 3: Complete the sentences. - do/ have. 1.What time ..... you ..... breakfast?. - get.. 2. I ..... up at six.. - get.. 3.What time does he ..... up?. - gets.. 4. He ...up at six.. - does/ have.. 5. What time ... he .... breakfast?. - have.. 6. I ..... breakfast at six twenty.. - does/ have.. 7. What time ..... she .... breakfast?. - has. - does/ go.. 8. She ..... breakfast at seven. 9. What time ..... he .... to school?. - do/ wash.. 10. ..... you ..... your face in the morning? c. Consolidation ( 7 ms ). - T ask ss to practice in pair to ask and ansưer using “the present simple tense”. - Ss : ask and answer: Ss 1: What does your mother do every morning? Ss 2: My mother goes to market. Ss 1: What does your mother do every.

(145) - Repeat the content of the lesson.. morning? Ss 2: My farther goes to factory. .................................... .................................... - listen to the teacher.. d. Guide the home work ( 5 ms ). ? Read the passage and answer the questions. Hi, my name is Hoa. I’m a student. I get - Listen to the teacher. up at half past five. I take a shower and - write down Ex in their work book. get dressed. I have breakfast, then I leave the house at half past six. The school is near my house, so I walk. Classes start at seven and end at half past eleven. I walk home and have lunch at twelve o’clock. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. What time does Hoa get up? - Do the task at home. What time does she go to school? Does she go to school by car? Does she walk to school? What time do classes start? 6. What time do they end? * Teacher’s experence: Thời gian: ............................................................................................................... Nội dung: ................................................................................................................ Phương pháp:............................................................................................................ ============================ Date of preparing:. Date of teaching: 7. PERIOD 52 REVIEW “THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TENSE” 1. OBJECTIVE a. Knowledge..

(146) - By the end of the lesson: ss will be able to understand clearly the present progressive tense by doing some exercises. b. Skill. - 4 skills. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION a. Teacher: Teaching plan, the referent books. b. Students: Prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE a. Checking the previous lesson ( 5 ms ). ? Call ss go to the board to correct exercise the given last period. * Answers. 1. She gets up at half past five. 2. She goes to school at half past six. 3. No, she doesn’t. 4. Yes, she does. 5. They classes start at seven. 6. They end at twelve. b. Teaching the new lesson. Teacher’s activities. Students’ activities. Time 5’ I. The present continuous tense. * Form. S + am / is / are + V-ing * Use - Dùng để diễn tả một hành động đang xảy ra vào thời điểm nói. - T: ask ss repeat the form of the.

(147) present continuous.. 13’. * Notes. - Có một số động từ tận cùng bằng chữ e , ta bỏ e rồi thêm đuôi ing vào sau động từ. Example: to write -> writing to ride -> riding to drive -> driving - Có một số động từ phải gấp đôi phụ âm cuối trước khi thêm ing. Example : to run -> running to swim -> swimming - Thì HTTD thường được dùng với các trạng từ : now, right now, at the moment, at present. II. Practice. Exercise 1: Choose the correct form of the verbs in brackets. - isn’t working / is swimming. - is teaching. - isn’t .....wearing.. 1. She .... ( not work) she ..... (swim) in the river. - are playing. 2. He ..... history to ride. (teach) - is riding. 18’. 3. Why ....... Ann ..... her new dress? ( not wear). - are waiting. - is watching.. 4. They ...... volleyball now. (play) - are playing. 5. Minh ..... his bike. (ride) - is listening. 6. They .... for a bus. (wait) 7. She .... television. (watch). - are walking.. 8. We .... soccer. (play). - is traveling..

(148) 9. He .... to music. (listen ). - is going.. 10. They ... to school. (walk). Exercise 2: Read the passage and answer the questions.. 11. He ... to Ha Noi.( travel) 12. She .... to the store. ( go). It’s five o’clock in the morning. Mr Quang is a truck driver and he is going to a farm. He is arriving at the farm. A farmer is waiting for him. Mr Quang and the farmer are loading the truck with vegetables. Mr Quang is driving to Ha Noi. He is taking the vegetables to the market. Mr Quang is at the market. He is unloading the vegetables. It’s seven o’clock and Mr Quang is eating his breakfast at a foodstall. 1.What does Mr Quang do? 2. Where is he going at five in the morning? 3. Who is waiting for him? 4. Where is he taking the vegetables to? 5. What is he doing at seven o’clock? 6. Where is he eating? c. Consolidation. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the home work. ? Present simple and present progressive tenses. 2’. * Answers. -> He is a truck driver. -> He is going to a farm at five in the morning. -> A farmer is waiting for him. -> He is taking the vegetables to the market. -> He is eating his breakfast at seven o’clock. -> He is eating at a food stall..

(149) 7’. a. (play) - They .... volleyball every day. - They ..... volleyball now. b. (ride) - She ..... her bike to school. - She ..... her bike now. c. (go) - We .... to school by bus every day. - We .... to school by bus today. d. (walk) - I .... to school every day. - I .... to school now. e. (drive) - He ... his struck. - He .... his struck at the moment..

(150) Date of preparing: 12/12/2010. PERIOD 53. Date of teaching: 16/12/2010 – Class 7A 21/12/2010 – Class 7B. REVIEW. 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to use the present simple and progressive tense of the verbs by doing some exercises. b. Skill. - 4 skills. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher: Teaching plan, the referent books. b. Students: Prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Time Teacher’s activities 2’ a. Checking the previous lesson.. Students’ activities. (Optional) * Warm - up. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. go to the board and write the answer. 3’. 10’. - T: Give ss exercises then call on some go to the board and write the answer. Exercise 1. Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets 1 There (be) many flowers in. Key:.

(151) the garden. 1.. 2 My teacher (go) to work by 2. motorbike 3 He(play) video game now 3. 4 I(do) my homework every afternoon 5 She(live) in the countryside. are goes is playing. 4.. do. 5.. lives. - T: Call on some sts do write the answer. - T: Correct the mistakes Exercise 2. Read the first sentence write the second with the same 10’. meaning. 1. Long is a bad swimmer.. Key: - Long swim...................................................................................................... 2. Mr. Cuong plays table tennis well.. 1. long swims is very bad - Mr. Cuong....................................................................................................... 3. My brother cycles slowly.. 2. Mr. Cuong is a good table - My brother...................................................................................................... tennis player 4. Mrs. Chi is a quick typist. - Mrs. Chi types................................................................................................. 3. My brother is a slow cycle 5. Miss Lan is a fast runner. - Miss Lan runs.................................................................................................. 4. Mrs. Chi types quickly 6. Mr. Hung is a safe driver. - He drives......................................................................................................... 5. Miss Lan runs very fast - T: Correct the mistakes. Exercise 3. Read the passage then 6. answer the questions 15’. Thank you for calling the North London Arts Cinema. It opens 7 days a week showing a variety of British and foreign movies. Next week we. He drives safely.

(152) still show an Italian movie called “Mid night meeting”. It’s set in Milan in the 1950s. You can see that movie from Monday to Thursday. It will be on twice a day in the evening. That’s at 6.45 and 9.15. The movie last two hours and fifteen minutes. Tickets are 30.000 VND but there is a special students tickets at 10.000 VND for all our midweek movies. Please bring your student card if you want the cheaper ticket. The nearest car park to the cinema is in Victory street. It’s just five minutes walk from the cinema. If you require further information, phone during office hours – 9 am to 4.30 pm. Monday to Friday. Questions. 1. How many days a week does the North London Arts Cinema open? 2. What is the title of the movie next week? 3. How long does the movie last? 4. What does students have to do to have the cheaper ticket? 5. How far is it from the nearest car park to the cinema?. Key: 1. It open seven days a week 2. It’s “Midnight meeting” 3. 4 days 4. They have to bring their sts cards 5. Five minutes walk from the cinema. c. Consolidation. - Repeat the content of the lesson. 3’ 2’. d. Guide the home work. - Ask ss to redo all the exercises in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “TEST the first semester”. Date of preparing: 26/12/2009. Date of teaching: 30/12/2009 - Class 7A.

(153) 30/12/2009 - Class 7B 30/12/2009 - Class 7C PERIOD 54. TEST “The first semester”. 1.OBJECTIVE - Test their knowledge which have learnt and remark the result of their work. 2. THE CONTENT OF THE TEST. QUESTIONS I. Listen to the passage about Lan , Hoa and Quan . Then complete the table . (2.5 pts) Name Lan. Age (1)……….. Hoa. 12. Quan. 11. Job Student (3). ………… Student. Hobby (2). …………. Phone number 8 574 593. Watching TV. (4).……………... (5). ………….. 9 321 840. II. Read the passage and choose one suitable option ( A,B or D ) to complete the following sentences . (2.5 pts) Mr.Thanh is a farmer . He has some paddy fields and he produces a lot of rice . Near his house , he has a small field and he grows a few vegetables . He also has a few fruit trees . They produce a little fruit . Mr.Thanh has some animals . He has four buffaloes and a few cows . He has some chickens . They produce a lot of eggs . He also has two dogs and three cats . 1. Mr. Thanh produces ___________________ A. a lot of rice B. a lot of vegetables 2. Near his house , he has _________________________ A. some paddy fields B. some animals 3. Mr. Thanh has ____________ animals . A. a lot of B. some 4. He has four buffaloes and __________ cows . A. a few B. two 5. He also has _______________.. C. a lot of fruit C. a small field C. a few C. some.

(154) A. two dogs and a cat cats. B. a dog and three cats. C. two dogs and three. III. Match the questions in Column A with their answers in Column B . (2.5 pts) A 1. How far is it from Ha Noi to Vinh ? 2. What does your father do ? 3. Which class are you in ? 4. Where will she go Tomorrow ? 5. How much are four local stamps ? 1._____. 2._____. 3._____. B a. She’ll go to Ha Long Bay . b. I’m in class 7B c. It is about 319 kilometers . d. They are 32.000 dong . e. He is a factory worker . 4._____. 5._____. IV. Arrange the provided words in order to make the completed sentences . (2.5 pts) 1. have / English / on / We / class / Tuesday . ->..................................................................................................................................... 2. is / She / Technology / studying / class / now . -> ..................................................................................................................................... 3. would / I / to / like / send / Ho Chi Minh City / this letter / to . -> ..................................................................................................................................... 4. He / to / needs / some / buy / post cards . -> ..................................................................................................................................... 5. you / the / show / way / Could / me / the / to/ police station ? -> ..................................................................................................................................... 3. ANSWERS. I. Each correct answer is o.5 point. 1. 12 2. watching movies. 3. student 4. 9.168.427 5. go fishing/fishing. Tape transcript. Lan is 12 years old. She is a student at Quang Trung Lower Secondary School. She likes watching movies. She lives in Hng Bai Street. Her phone number is 8.574.593. Hoa is a student, too. She is 12 year old. She likes watching TV. Her phone number is 9.168.427. Quang is a student at Truong Vuong School. He is only 11. He likes fishing. He lives in a house near his school. His phone number is 9.321.840..

(155) II. Each correct answer is o.5 point. 1-A 2-C 3-B 4-A 5-C III. Each correct sentence is 0.5 point. 1.- c 2. - e 3. - b. 4. - a. 5. - d.. IV. Each correct completed sentence is 0.5 point. 1. We have English class on Tuesday. 2. She is studying Technology class now. 3. I would like to send this letter to Ho Chi Minh City. 4. He needs to buy some postcards. 5. Could you show me the way to the police station. 4. REMARK . Knowledge ……………………………………………………………………… Skill ……………………………………………………………………………... Decorate ………………………………………………………………………… Express …………………………………………………………………………...

(156) Date of preparing: 31/12/2013.. Date of teaching: 02/01/2014: Class 7A,7C,7B. PERIOD 55 UNIT 9 AT HOME AND AWAY LESSON 1: A/ A HOLIDAY IN NHA TRANG (A1) 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to know the usage and form of the past simple tense. b. Skill . Practice asking and answering the dialogue in pairs c. Education. The students like learning English . 2. Preparation. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape, pictures. b. Students : Books, pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson (Optional ) * Warm – up,(5’) - Organize students discuss about the last semester with some questions in groups . (?) What do you remember most in the first semester ? (?) In which subject do you get the highest score ? (?) What are you going to do in this semester ? - T: Ask the students some suggested questions to introduce the content of the lesson : (?) What do you always do in summer ? (?) Do you like traveling ? - T: Hang a picture on the board and come on asking them : (?) Do you know which place is it ? (?) What can we do when we visit Nha Trang ? b. Teaching the new lesson .(15’) * Presentation - T: Introduce : We are going to listen to a. Students’ activities. - Discuss in groups answer the questions. - Ss: answer the questions.. - Ss: look at the board and answer the questions..

(157) conversation between Ba and Liz . They are talking about Liz’s vacation in Nha Trang . You listen and tell me what they did there ? - T: Let them listen to the tape once. - T: Introduce some new words and new structure “ The past simple tense ” - T: Ask them to give some examples using the past simple tense .. 1. Listen . Then practice with a partner. - Ss: listen to the tape. - Ss: listen to the tape - Ss: listen and write. * New words: - wonderful (adj) : tuyệt vời - friendly (adj) : thân thiện - delicious (adj) : ngon - gift (n) : quà - aquarium (n) : bể cá * New structure“ The past simple tense ” + Form : 1. To be - was - were 2. Ordinary verb S + V- ed + O - past ( PI ). - T: Pay attention to read “ ed ” for the students .. * Practice(14’) - T: Have them practice the conversation in pairs. + Use : - The past simple tense is used to express an action that completely finished in the past . This tense always goes with : Yesterday ; last night / week / year …. ; ago - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. + Note : * “ Ed ” trong các động từ có quy tắc ở thì quá khứ có 3 cách đọc - Phát âm / t / khi động từ kết thúc là 1 phụ âm vô thanh . Eg : walk - > walked - Phát âm / d / khi động từ kết thúc bằng 1 phụ âm hữu thanh Eg : open - > opened - Phát âm / id / khi động từ kết thúc là “t” or “d” Eg : want -> wanted * Irregular verbs take -> took.

(158) - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class to check their pronunciation If necessary . - T: Ask them to read the conversation again carefully and do exercise in the textbook . Arrange these sentences in the correct order based the content of the lesson . - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner . - T: Call on some students to give their answers before the class . Others listen and remark . - T: Listen , remark and give the correct answers .. buy -> bought have -> had - Ss: work in pairs. - Ss: work in front of the class. * Now answer. Number the sentences. - Ss: read the dialogue again and do exercise. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers. - Ss: correct and write the correct answers in the exercise book. * Answer key (3) Liz bought souvenirs. (2) Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium (4) Liz returned to Ha Noi (1) Liz went to Nha Trang (5) Liz talked to Ba about her vacation. * Production.(6’) - T: ask ss to discuss about what they do in last summer or last week - T: ask ss to ask similar questions - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson + New words + New structure “ the past simple tense ” d. Homework. (2’) - Ask the students to learn by heart the new words and structure . - Read the conversation again and translate it into Vietnamese . - Do exercises 1,2 in the workbook on page 53 . - Prepare the next period “ A2,3 ” before going to school . * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================.

(159) Date of preparing: 31/12/2013.. Date of teaching: 03/01/2014: Class 7A,7C,B.. PERIOD 56 UNIT 9 AT HOME AND AWAY LESSON 2: A/ A HOLIDAY IN NHA TRANG (A2,3) 1. Aim a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to further practice the past simple tense by reading . At the same time , students can understand the passage which writing about the trip of Liz’s family . b. Skill . - Practice reading skill . c. Education. - The students like learning English . 2. Preparations. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, cassette, tape, pictures. b. Students : Books , pen ; prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3.Stage of the lesson. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson(7’) - T: Call some students go to the board to correct exercise 1 on page 53 in the workbook. - T: Call on some others remark and correct if necessary. - T: Remark and get marks.. * Warm – up (3’) - T: Ask students to look at the text between Ba and Liz in the last period. - T: Ask them some suggested questions about the content of the text (?) How was Liz’s vacation ? (?)What did she think of Nha Trang ? (?) What places did she visit ?. Students’ activities - Go to the board to do exercise 1 a. Regular b. Irregular - arrived - was/were - helped - had - looked - went - received - took - remembered - bought - rented - saw ……………………………. - Ss: look at the text. - Answer the teacher’s questions.. - T: Introduce : In the last period, We - Ss: listen to the teacher. heard Liz telling about her vacation in Nha Trang with her family . In Today’s lesson,.

(160) We’ll read the text about one of the most interesting and memorable activities which Liz and her family did during the vacation . - T: Ask them - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. (?) Can you guess What Liz and her family did during the visit to Tri Nguyen Aquarium ? b. Teaching the new lesson.. 2. Listen and read. Then answer the questions.. * Pre – reading(10’) - T: Let them listen to the tape once . - T: Introduce and explain some new words in the text .. - Ss: listen to the tape once - Ss: listen and write in their exercise book. * New words : - shark (n) : cá mập - dolphin (n) : cá heo - turtle (n) : rùa biển - crap (n) : con cua - exit (n) : lối ra - cap (n) : mũ lưỡi trai - poster (n) : bức tranh - colorful (adj) : nhiều màu - instead (v) : thay thế, thay vào - Ss: listen and repeat the new words twice. - Ss: read the words in front of the class.. - T: Let them listen and repeat the words twice following the teacher . - T: Call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation. * While – reading (13’) - T: Ask them to read the text silently and answer the questions. a. Who went to the aquarium with Liz ? b. What did the Robinsons see there ? c. What did they buy in the souvenir shop ? d. Did Liz like the cap ? Which sentence tells you this ? e. Do Mr. and Mrs. Robinson like to eat seafood ? How do you know ? f. Why did Liz eat noodles for lunch ?. * Questions. - Read the text and do the exercise..

(161) - T: Go around the class to help the students if necessary . - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner . - T: Call some students read aloud their answers before the class . Others listen , remark and correct if necessary . - T: Correct and give the correct answers.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their answers.. - T: Come on asking them to look at the pictures and tell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium. - T: Go around the class to help the students to tell. - T: Call some students to look at the pictures and retell about Liz’s trip and her family to Tri Nguyen Aquarium before the class. - T: Correct and give the corrected Answers.. - Ss: retell the story in front of the class.. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys : a. Her parents went to the aquarium with her. b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles and many different types of fish. c. They bought a cap and a poster. d. Yes, she did . Liz wore the cap all day. e. Yes. They ate fish and cab. f. Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium. * Now tell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium. - Ss: look at the picture and tell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium.. - Ss: listen, correct and write in their exercise book. * Answer keys : a. The Robinson family went to the aquarium . b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles and many colorful fish. c. There was a souvenir shop near the exit of the aquarium. d. Mr. Robinson bought Liz a cap with a picture of a dolphin on it . Mrs. Robinson bought a poster . e. After their visit to aquarium, the Robinsons went to a food stall. Mr. and Mrs. Robinson ate fish and crab and Liz ate noodles 3. Listen. Write the letter of the.

(162) sentences you hear . - Ss: look at the section A3 * Post - reading.(8’) - Ss: read the pair of sentence. - T: Ask the students to look at the section 3 on page 89. - T: Ask them to read five pair of sentences in it (a-b; c-d; e-f; g-h; i-j) quickly. - T: Guide : We are going to listen to the tape about the trip of Liz’s family to Nha Trang . You listen to it and choose the sentence in each pair which contain the similar information in the tape. - T: Let them listen to the tape three times . - T: Ask them to listen and do exercise “ choose the correct information …” - T: Go around the class to help them if necessary. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers and explain before the class. - T: Let them listen to the tape at last time and give the correct answers Tape transcript . The Robinsons had a great holiday in Nha Trang . Unfortunately , the holiday soon ended and it was time to return home. They took a bus back to Ha Noi. Liz was excited as the bus drove through the countryside. She saw rice paddies for the first time. Everything looked calm and peaceful . At four o’clock, the bus stopped at the small roadside restaurant for 10 minutes. Mr. Robinson was asleep, so Mrs. Robinson bought some peanuts and an ice – cream for Liz. The bus arrived in Ha Noi at about 7pm . c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson and. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: listen to the tape three times.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their answers. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. b. d. e. h. j.. - Ss: Listen and remember.

(163) some irregular verbs : + See - > saw + Think - > thought + Go - > went + Wear - > wore + Eat - > ate + Put - > put d. Homework.(2’) - Ask the students to learn by heart the new words and some irregular verbs in the lesson . - Ask them to reread the text again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 3 on page 54 in the workbook . - Prepare the next period “A4,5” before going to school.. - Ss: Write down. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 05/01/2014.. Date of teaching: 08/01/2014 - Class 7A,B,C..

(164) PERIOD 57 UNIT 9 AT HOME AND AWAY LESSON 3 : A/ A HOLIDAY IN NHA TRANG (A4) 1. Aim a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to review the past simple tense and understand the content f the lesson by listening and reading . b. Skills . - Improve reading and writing skills . c. Education. - The students like learning English . 2. PREPARATION a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook, pictures or posters. b. Students : Books , pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3.Stages of the lesson.. Teacher’s activities a. checking the previous lesson(7’) - T: Call students go to the board to correct exercise 2 on page 53 in the workbook . - T: Call on some others to remark - T: Remark and get points.. * Warm – up(5’) - T: Introduce : In the last period, you already knew what Liz and her family did during the trip to Nha Trang . In this lesson , you’ll have a chance to know more about their trip such as means of transport arrival time .... at the same time , you’ll know more about Ba who is Liz’s friend.. Students’ activities - T: Go to the board to do exercise 2 a. saw b. went c. took d. spoke ………………………………. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Pre – reading(10’) 4. Read Ba’s diary - T: introduce the content of the lesson. “ Liz and Ba are friends . This morning, they meet each other. Can you guess what they. - Ss: listen to the teacher..

(165) talk about ? You’ll read Ba’s diary. In this diary Ba wrote more about his American friend , Liz. - T: Ask ss to read Ba’s diary. - T: introduce some new words in the text. - Ss: read the text. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words: - T: let ss listen and repeat the new words + rent (v) : thuê three times. + move (v) : chuyển - T: call on some students to read the words + keep in touch (v) : giữ liên lạc again to check their pronunciation. - Ss: listen and repeat the new words. - Ss: read the words again before the * While - reading. class. - T: ask ss to read the text carefully. Ask them to look at the part “ Now make these * Now make these sentences true. sentences true ” and correct those sentences with the content of the lesson . - Ss: read the text carefully and do - T: Write the example on the board and exercise. explain the way to do exercise . Example : Mr.Robinson came to VN on vacation . - > Mr.Robinson came to VN to work - Ss: look at the board. - T: Go around the class to help the students if necessary. - T: Have them compare their answers before the class. Others listen and remark . - T: Correct and give the right answers. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: correct and write in their exercise book. * Answer keys a. Liz lived next door to Ba . b. Liz learned Vietnamese in Vietnam . c. Ba collects stamps . d. Liz’s aunt lives in New York . e. The Robinsons moved to the other side of Ha Noi . f. The Robinsons moved. Ba is sad g. Ba will see Liz next week ..

(166) * Post - reading.(8’) - T: Call some students read the diary of Ba again . - T: ask ss to tell again the letter or sum up the letter. - T: call ss to stand up to practice - Ss: read Ba’s diary again. - T: correct mistakes - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: practice in pairs c.Consolidations(3’) - Repeat : + The information about the Robinsons’ trip + The content of the reading. + Some irregular verbs in the past simple tense.. 5. Play with words ( Optional ). - Ss: Listen and remember. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and the irregular verbs. - Read the diary of Ba again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 4 in the workbook on page - Ss: Write on the exercise book. 54 and 55. - Prepare the next period “B1,2” * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================.

(167) Date of preparing: 06/01/2014.. Date of teaching: 09/01/2014 - Class 7A,7C,7B.. PERIOD 58 UNIT 9 AT HOME AND AWAY LESSON 4 : B/ NEIGHBORS (B1,2) 1.Aim a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to understand the dialogue between Lan and Hoa . At the same time , Review the past simple tense and exclamation in form “ What + N ! ”.Did you buy it? – No,I didn’t. Mrs Mai bought it. - New word: hairdresser,material, clever, dressmaker. b. Skill. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2. PREPARATION a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , cassette , tape , pictures … b. Students : Books , pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3. Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’). Students’ activities.

(168) - T: Call some students go to the board to correct exercise 4 on page 54 in the workbook . - T: Call on some others to remark - T: Remark and get points .. - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise 4. a. He gave her a present . b. No, he didn’t . He made it c. He made it yesterday . d. He made it from a piece of wood . ………………………….. - Ss: Answer the teacher’s questions. * Warm – up(2’) - T: Ask the students some suggested questions : (?) Are your neighbors friendly ? (?) Do you sometimes help them ? (?) What do they do for you ? (?) What do you do for them ? - T: Introduce the content of the lesson “ Neighbors ” b. Teaching the new lesson * Pre – listening.(15’) - T: Ask the students to look at the picture of section B1 and ask them some suggested questions : (?) Look at the picture and guess What are they doing ? - T: Set the scene : Lan and Hoa are friends . They are talking . Now you listen to the dialogue and tell me What are they talking about ? - T: Let them listen to the dialogue once - T: Introduce and explain some new words.. - T: Ask them to listen and repeat the words twice following the teacher . - T: Call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation . At the same time , repeat the form of the exclamation .. - Ss: listen. 1. Listen . Then practice with a partner . - Ss: look at the picture and answer the questions.. - Ss: listen. - Ss: listen to the dialogue. - Ss: listen and write the new words. * New words - cut (v) : cắt - hairdresser (n) : thợ uốn tóc - dressmaker (n) : thợ may - neighbor (n) : người hàng xóm - material (n) : vải , chất liệu - clever (adj) : thông minh - Ss: listen and repeat. - Ss: read the words again and repeat the form of exclamation. * Form of the exclamation. What + N ! - Ss: give examples..

(169) - T: Ask them to give some examples.. Example : - What a nice dress ! - What a clever woman !. * While – listening.(13’) - T: Let them listen to the dialogue the second time and have them listen and repeat in chorus . - T: Call on some pairs to work the dialogue before the class . - T: Come on asking them to read the dialogue silently and answer the questions : “ Now answer.” (?) a. What does Hoa’s aunt do ? (?) b. What does Mrs. Mai do ? - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner . - T: Call on some students to answer the questions in front of the class. Others listen and remark. - T: Correct and give the right answers. - Ss: listen to the dialogue.. * Post – listening.(5’). 2. Answer. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - T: Come on introducing : You have just heart about the story between Lan and Hoa . Now depending on the content of the dialogue . You answer the questions in section 2 with the short answer as : Yes, he/she did No, he/ she didn’t - T: Have them practice in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class . Others listen, remark and correct if necessary . - T: Remark , correct and give the right answers .. c. Consolidation(3’). - Repeat the content of the lesson :. - Ss: work the dialogue in front of the class. - Ss: read the dialogue silently and answer the questions.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys a. She is a hairdresser . b. she is a dressmaker .. - Ss: work in pairs. - Ss: practice in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in their exercise book. * Answer keys a. No, she didn’t . b. No, she didn’t. c. Yes, she did . - Ss: Listen and remember..

(170) + The content of the dialogue. + The form of the exclamation. + The new words in the lesson . d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and structure . - Read the dialogue again and translate it into Vietnamese . - Do exercises 1,2 on page 55 and 56 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B3,4” before going to school. - Ss: Write on the exercise book and do as the teacher requests .. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 07/01/2014.. PERIOD 59. Date of teaching: 10/01/2014 - Class 7A,7C,7B.. UNIT 9 AT HOME AND AWAY LESSON 5 : B/ NEIGHBORS (B3,4). 1. Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to understand the content of the passage about Hoa and write a short passage to retell the things which they did in the past . b. Skill . - Practice reading and writing skills . c. Education. - The students like learning English . 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures , cardboard . b. Students : Books , pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school ..

(171) 3. Stages of the leson. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) - T: Call students go to the board to correct exercise 1 in the workbook on page 55. - T: Call on some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points . * Warm – up.(2’) - T: Ask students some suggested questions : (?) What do you learn in Home Economic ? (?) Do you like it ? (?) What do you like the most in Home Economic ? - T: Introduce : We’ll read the passage about Hoa . She made herself a dress with helping of her neighbor. b. Teaching the new lesson.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise. a. borrowed b. decorated c. learnt d. helped …………………………….. - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions => sewing ; knitting ; cooking …. - Ss: listen.. 3. Read. Then answer. * Pre – reading.(10’) - T: Let them read the passage quickly once and find the new words. - T: Write the new words on the board and explain the meanings of them .. - T: Ask them to listen and repeat the words in chorus following the teacher twice. - T: Call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation . - T: Introduce the new structure “ learn how to + infinitive.” Ask them to give some examples .. - Ss: read the passage. - Ss: look at the board and write the new words. * New words - sew (v): may vá - hobby (n): sở thích - sewing machine (n): máy khâu - cushion (n): tấm đệm gối - fit (v): vừa, hợp -useful : - to tru on: - Ss: listen and repeat the new words. - Ss: read the words again.. - Ss: write in their exercise book. * New structure * While – reading.(15’) Learn how to + V- infinitive - T: Ask them to read the passage silently Example :.

(172) and answer the questions with the content of the passage. - T: Go around the class to help the students to do exercise. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner . - T: Call on some students to answer the questions before the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary - T: Listen , remark and give the right answers.. * Post – reading.(8’) - T: Explain the request of section 4 “ Write . Put the verbs in the brackets in the past simple tense .” - T: Let them read the uncompleted passage quickly. - T: Ask them to do exercise - T: Let them compare their answers with their friends . - T: Call on some students to give their answers . Others listen and remark. - T: Listen, remark and give the right answers.. Hoa learn how to sew . - Ss: read the passage and answer the questions.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in their exercise book. * Answers. a. She learned ( how ) to use a sewing machine. b. She made cushion for her armchair first. c. It was blue and white. d. Next, she made a skirt. e. It was green with white flowers on it. f. It looked very pretty. g. She tried it on but it didn’t fit. h. Hoa’s neighbor helped her. i. Finally, it fitted very well. 4. Write . Put the verbs in the brackets in the past simple tense - Ss: listen - Ss: read the uncompleted passage. - Ss: do exercise. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * Answer key watched bought.

(173) - T: Call on some students to read the completed passage to check their pronunciation.. cut used decided , was made, was , wasn’t helped , fitted - Ss: read the completed passage.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat + The content of the lesson. + The irregular verbs in the past simple tense. “Remember” - Ss: Listen and remember. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to read the passage again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 3 in the workbook on page 56. - Ss: Write on the exercise book and do - Prepare the next period “ Language exercise . focus .” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 12/01/2014. Date of teaching: 15/01/2014 - Class 7B,A,C..

(174) PERIOD 60. LANGUAGE FOCUS 3. 1.Aim a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to revise all the knowledge which they’ve learnt from Unit 7 to Unit 9 by doing exercises in Language focus 3 b. Skill . - Practice 4 skills . c. Education. - The students like learning English . 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures , cardboard . b. Students : Books , pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3.Stages of the leson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional ) * Warm - up.(1’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson “Language focus 3” b. Teaching the new lesson. 1. How much is it ?(5’) * Improve speaking skill : ask and answer about the price. - T: Repeat the structure which asking and answering about the price. - T: Ask them to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: Ask them to use the provided information in the table to make similar dialogues. - T: Call on some pairs to work their dialogues in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary.. - Ss: listen. - Ss: practice in pairs - Ss: make the dialogues. - Ss: work in front of the class. A. How much is the violet dress ? B. It’s 35,000 dong. A. And what about the green shirt ? B. It’s 20,000 dong. ………………………………. - T: Ask them to look at the map and write the. 2. Preposition (10’).

(175) location of each store. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to give their answers before the class . Others listen and remark. - T: Listen, correct and give the right answers.. a. Look at the map. Write the location of each store. - Ss: look at the map and write the location of each store. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers. - Ss: listen, correct and write in their exercise book. * Answer keys + The shoe store is on Hai Ba Trung Street. It’s next to/ near the clothing store to the left. + The bookstore is on Hue Street. It’s between the restaurant and the minima. + The restaurant in on Hue Street It’s next to/ beside bookstore to the left. + The minimart in on Hue Street. It’s next to/ beside the bookstore to the right. + The hairdresser’s in on Tay Ho Street. It’s in the park on the right. + The library is on Tay Ho Street It’s opposite the hairdresser’s.. - T: Ask them to read the dialogue in pairs. - T: Have them use the information in the table to practice . - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class. - T: Listen , remark and correct if necessary.. b. Look at the table . Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Ss: read the dialogue in pairs.. - Ss: use the information in the table to practice. - Ss: work in front of the class. A. How far is it from the clothing store to the bookstore ? - T: Repeat the form and use of the past simple B. It’s 450 meters. tense quickly. - T: Ask them to write the past form of the 3. Past simple tense.(10’) verbs in the table. a. Write the past form of the verbs in - T: Call on some students to go to the board to the table. write. - Ss: listen. - T: Remark and correct if necessary..

(176) - Ss: write the past form of the verbs in the table. - Ss: go to the board to write.. - T: Ask them to look at the section b. and Then complete the sentences using the words in the box. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their completed sentences. Others listen , remark and correct if necessary. - T: Remark, correct and give the correct answers.. - Ss: look at the board, correct and write in their exercise book. Verbs Past form buy bought help helped remember remembered take took send sent think thought talk talked b. Complete the sentences . Use the words in the box. - Ss: complete the sentences. - Ss: read their completed sentences.. - T: Repeat the simple tenses quickly. - T: Ask them to look at Nga’s diary and complete the dialogue. - T: Call on some pairs to practice their completed dialogue in front of the class. - T: Listen and correct if necessary.. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers I played volleyball last week. Yesterday, I talked to my grandmother. Last December, Mom bought a new bike. Dad worked in Hue a few years ago. I sent a letter to my pen pal last month. 4. Simple tenses.(4’) - Ss: listen. - Ss: complete the dialogue. - Ss: work their completed dialogue. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers Nga : Everyday I clean my room.

(177) help my Mom and study English . Minh: What did you do yesterday ? Nga: I cleaned my room, helped my Mom, study English, watched TV, played volleyball and stayed Hoa’s house. Minh: How about tomorrow ? Nga: I will study English, Clean my room, help my Mom, see - T: Explain the request of exercise 5. a movie, visit my grandmother - T: Repeat the use of “more, less and fewer ”. and buy new shoes. - T: Ask them to look at two refrigerators and compare the things in them “ Before and now.” 5. More, less and fewer.(9’) - T: Ask them to write the new sentences with - Ss: listen. “more”, “less” and “fewer”. - T: Call on some students to read their completed sentences. - Ss: look at the two refrigerators. - T: Listen, remark and give the correct - Ss: write the new sentences. answers. - Ss: read their completed answers. - Ss: listen, correct and write in their exercise book. * Answers. + Before there were 4 bananas. Now there are fewer bananas. + Before there were 500 ml of orange juice. Now there is more orange juice. + before there were 200grams of butter. Now there is more butter. + Before there were no cabbages Now there is one cabbage. + Before there were a lot of milk. Now there is less milk. + Before there were 2 tomatoes. Now there are more tomatoes. + before there were 2 onions. Now there are not any onions. + before there were no chickens. Now there is one chicken. + Before there were 2 eggs/ not many eggs. Now, there are more/ a lot of eggs. + Before there was a lot of meat..

(178) c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the Language focus 3 as : + The past simple tense. + Simple tenses. + Comparatives of nouns .. Now there is less meat. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Ss: Write down in the exercise book and do the exercises again.. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to redo all the exercises in Language focus 3 in their exercise book. - Prepare the new lesson “Unit 10 : A/ Personal hygiene ” * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 13/01/2014.. PERIOD 61. Date of teaching: 16/01/2014 - Class 7A,7C,7B.. UNIT 10 HEALTH AND HYGIENE LESSON 1 : A/ PERSONAL HYGIENE (A1). 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to talk about their personal hygiene and understand content of the letter and answer the questions. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures , cardboard . b. Students : Books , pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3. Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) - T: Call two students go to the board to do exercise 3 in the test yourself in the workbook.. - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise. S1 :.

(179) - T: Call on some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm - up.(2’) - T: ask ss to play game slap the board candy farm work hard visit get up. a.. Nga talked to Lan yesterday. S2 : c. Nga played tennis yesterday. …………………………….. …………………………….. - Ss: play game.. happy wash - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation. - T: guide ss to look at the letter and guess content of the letter - T: introduce new word by some situations.. - Ss: listen.. 1. Read. Then answer the questions. (10’) - Ss: look at and guess. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + harvest (n) : mùa vụ (v) : thu hoặch + take morning exercise (v) : tập thể - T: guide ss to read new words dục buổi sáng - T: call on some students to read the words + take care of (v) : quan tâm, chăm again to check their pronunciation. sóc + iron (v) : là quần áo * Practice.(15’) - Ss: read in chorus - Ss: read the words before the class. - T: ask ss to read the letter - T: ask ss to read and answer the questions - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes - Ss: read the letter. - Ss: read and answer - Ss: answer in front of class - Ss: listen, correct and write in their exercise book. * Answer keys. a. They are busy because it is almost.

(180) * Production.(8’) - T: ask ss to do exercise ‘ True or False’ 1. Hoa’s parents are well 2. Hao’s mother received a letter from Hoa’s aunt last month 3. Hoa’s mother miss her a lot 4. Hoa’s parents will visit her in HN next Sunday. - T: call ss to stand up to give answers - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. + The new words.. harvest time. b. Hoa’s grand father helps them on the farm. c. They will (hope to ) go to Ha Noi soon , after the harvest. d. Now Hoa is different. She gets up early and does morning exercises everyday . e. Hoa’s mother wants her to : do her own washing and ironing Hoa’s mother doesn’t want her to : eat too much candy. stay up late. Exercise: Answer true or false. - Ss: do exercise.. Ss: give their answers. - Ss: listen, remark and write in their exercise book. * Answers. 1. T 2. F 3.T 4. F. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to write the letter again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Write 5 sentences to describe the daily activities to keep the personal hygiene. - Do exercises 1,2 on page 61 and 62 in the workbook. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Prepare the new lesson “ A2,3” before going to school.. - T: Write in the exercise book. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 14/01/2014.. Date of teaching: 17/01/2014 - Class 7A,7B,7C..

(181) PERIOD 62. UNIT 10 HEALTH AND HYGIENE LESSON 2 : A/ PERSONAL HYGIENE (A2,3). 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to talk and write about habits and routines. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures , cassette ,tape ,chalk . b. Students : Books , pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3. Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(4’) - T: Call some students go to the board to talk about their daily activities to keep the personal hygiene. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm - up.(1’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Go to the board to talk about their daily activities. Example. I get up early to do exercises. ……………………………... ……………………………... - Ss: listen. b. New lesson. * Presentation.(8’) - T: Ask ss to look at the pictures in section A2 on page 100. - T: Ask them to work in pairs and guess What Hoa did in each picture.. 2. Listen. Listen and put the pictures in the order you hear. - Ss: look at the pictures. - Ss: guess.. * Practice.(20’) - T: Let them listen to the tape twice and put the pictures in order. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to give their answers before the class. Others listen and. - Ss: listen to the tape twice and put the pictures in order. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class..

(182) remark. - T: Let them listen to the tape again and give the correct answers.(7') * Tape transcript. Yesterday, Hoa got up and took a shower. She put on clean clothes. She polished her shoes and put them on. She had her breakfast and then she brushed her teeth. She put a sandwich in her lunch box and a bottle of water in her bag. She went to school. At recess, she ate her sandwich. Then she drank some water and talked with her friends. At home , she changed into red pants and a shirt, and put on her sandals. After dinner, she washed and ironed he clothes. Then she did her homework. She brushed her teeth and had a bath. Then she went to bed at 11 o’clock. - T: Ask students to look at the section A3 and guide “ This is Nam’s diary. Now you look at it and practice asking and answering about the things which Nam did.” - T: Call on some pairs to ask and answer before the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct their pronunciation.. - T: Guide : depend on Nam’s diary. You write a diary for your self. - T: Call on some students to read their diary in front of the class. - T: listen and correct if necessary. * Production.(7’). - Ss: listen, correct and write the correct answers. * Answers. 1–a 2–e 3–f 4–d 5–g 6–c 7–h 8–b. 3. Read Nam’s diary. - Ss: look at Nam’s diary and listen to the teacher’s explains.. - Ss: ask and answer before the class. * Example. S1: What does Nam do everyday ? S2: He gets up, does morning exercises……… S1: What time does he get up ? S2: He gets up at 6.30. ……………………………. ……………………………. - Ss: listen and do as the teacher’s guide. - Ss: read their diary - Ss: listen and correct..

(183) - T: Have them practice in pairs. - T: Let them ask and answer questions about routines each other. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class. - T: Listen and correct.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson : + Write a diary. + The form of the letter.. - Ss: work in pairs. - Ss: ask and answer about the routines each other. - Ss: practice in front of the class. S1: What do you do ? S2: I get up, wash face, …….. S1: What time do you get up ? S2: I get up at 5.25 …………………………….. …………………………….. - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ss: Write in the exercise book. - Ask them to write a diary which talking about the things they did. - Ask them to write a letter to a friend with the same content . - Do exercises 3, 4 on page 62 and 63 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A4” * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 19/01/2014.. Date of teaching: 22/01/2014 - Class 7A,C,B..

(184) PERIOD 63. UNIT 10 HEALTH AND HYGIENE LESSON 3 : A/ PERSONAL HYGIENE (A4). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to write a letter to thanks. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Check the previous lesson.(6’) (Optional) * Warm - up.(1’) - T: ask ss to play game slap the board letter harvest difficult fine careful visit go to bed - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. Students’ activities. - Ss: play game. - Ss: listen.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.(10’) - T: guide ss to look at the letter and ask (?) Who writes the letter? (?) Who receives the letter? (?) What are they talking about? - T: guide ss to complete the letter and guess - T: call ss to stand up to answer * Practice.(15’). 4. Write. Complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs - Ss: look at and answer => Hoa => Mom - Ss: guess - Ss: answer.

(185) - T: ask ss to read and complete the letter. - T: ask ss to compare their result - Ss: read and complete the letter. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes. * Production.(8’) - T: ask ss to read the letter and answer true or false 1. Everything is strange and difficult. 2. Everyday, she gets up early to has a bath. 3. She never stays up late 4. She eats too much candy. - T: call ss to stand up to answer - T: correct mistakes.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer in front of class. - Ss: correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. 1. was 2. having 3. show 4. take 5. get 6. go 7. wash 8. iron 9. eating 10. told 11. see 12. go Exercise: Answer true or false. - Ss: read the letter again and do exercise. 1.T 3.T. 2.F 4.F. - Ss: answer. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. - Ss: listen and remember. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask ss to read the letter again to translate it into Vietnamese. - Ss: do as the teacher’s request. - Do exercises in workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1,2” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 20/01/2014. Date of teaching: 23/01/2010 - Class 7A,C,B..

(186) PERIOD 64. UNIT 10 HEALTH AND HYGIENE LESSON 4 : B/ A BAD TOOTHACHE (B1,2). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to tell the things which happened when they went to check their teeth. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(6’) - T: Call some students go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions : (?) What do you do everyday ? (?) What time do you go to school ? (?) What did you do yesterday ? ……………………………… - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(1’) - Ask students some suggested questions : (?) What should you do if you have a toothache ? (?) What does the dentist do when you came to see him/ her ? (?) Do you scare when you meet the dentist ?. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions. -> I get up early, wash my face ………………………………. ……………………………….. - Ss: Listen and answer.. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson.. - Ss: listen to the teacher..

(187) * Pre – listening.(10’) - T: Introduce : “We are going to listen to a 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. dialogue between Minh and Hoa. Hoa is telling Minh how she had her cavity filled - Ss: listen to the teacher. last week”. - T: Let them listen to the dialogue twice. - T: Introduce and explaining the meanings of the new words in the dialogue. - Ss: listen to the dialogue twice.. - T: Ask them to listen and repeat the words twice following the teacher. - T: Call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation.. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + dentist (n) : nha sĩ + have a toothache (v) : bị đau răng. + appointment (n) : cuộc hẹn + drill (n) : cái khoan + cavity (n) : lỗ răng sâu + scared (adj) : sợ hãi + fill (v) : lấp trỗ trống/ hàn răng + fix one’s teeth (v) : chữa răng - Ss: listen and repeat the new words twice. - Ss: read the words again in front of the class.. * While – listening.(15’) * Now answer. - T: Let them listen and repeat the dialogue. - T: Ask the to practice it in pairs. - T: Call some pairs practice it before the class to check their pronunciation. - T: Come on asking them to read through the questions. Then find the answers. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class. Others listen and remark. - T: Correct and give the right answers.. - Ss: listen and repeat the dialogue. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ss: practice it in front of the class. - Ss: read the questions and find out the answers. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their answers before the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. a. Minh has a toothache. b. No, he doesn’t. The loudness of the drill scares him. c. Because she had a toothache.( or, to have a.

(188) * Post - listening.(8’) - T: Introduce : “ You are going to listen to the tape about Dr. Lai , the woman Hoa mentioned in the dialogue. Can you guess What is she like ? ” - T: Have them read the questions from “a” to “d”. - T: Let them listen to the tape three times . Ask them to answer the questions in section B2. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to answer the questions before the class. Others listen , remark and correct if necessary. - T: Let the listen to the tape at last time and give the correct answers. * Tape transcript. Dr. Lai is a dentist at Quang Trung School. She looks after all the students’ teeth, Dr. Lai’s office is clean and so is her uniform. She always washes her hands after each child leaves. Many children are scare when they come to see Dr. Lai, but she is a kind woman. She explains what will happen so they are not afraid. Dr. Lai gives the children advise she tells them how to look after their teeth. She reminds them to clean their teeth regularly and eat sensibly.. cavity filled. ) d. She filled the cavity in her teeth. * About you. ( Suggested answers) e. I went to the dentist. f. Yes, I am. 2. Listen and answer. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: read the questions. - Ss: listen to the tape three times and answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen to the tape at last time, correct and write the correct answers in the exercise book. * Answers. a. Dr. Lai is a dentist. b. Dr Lai wears an uniform to work. c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai. d. She explain what will happen she gives them advise . She tell them how to look after their teeth and reminds them to clean their teeth regularly and eat sensibly.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the new words and the content of the dialogue between Hoa and Minh. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask the to learn by heart the new words and reread the dialogue and then translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1 in the workbook on page. - Ss: Listen and remember..

(189) 63. - Ss: Write in the exercise book. - Prepare the next period “ B2,3 ” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 21/01/2014. PERIOD 65. Date of teaching: 24/01/2014 - Class 7B,A,C.. UNIT 10 HEALTH AND HYGIENE LESSON 5 : B/ A BAD TOOTHACHE (B3,4,5*). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to tell the things which happened when they went to check their teeth. Further practice in pairs or groups about the health and hygiene. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(6’) - T: Call students go to the board to correct exercise “ Match the English words in Column A with the Vietnamese words in column B. ” A B. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise.. * Answers..

(190) 1. 2. 3.. matter toothache appointme nt. 4.. fill cavity. 5. 6.. a. a. hàn răng b. cuộc hẹn c. nha sĩ d. đau răng e. vấn đề f. sợ. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.. dentist scared 1. ………. 2. …….. 3. ………. 4. ………. 5. …….. 6. ………. - T: Call some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points . * Warm - up.(1’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.(10’) - T: Introduce continuously “ In the section B1,2 We learn about Minh and Dr Lai. As you know Minh has a toothache and has to go to the dentist. You’ll read the passage with describing the meeting Minh and Dr Lai. (?) Can you guess what Dr Lai will say and do ? - T: Let them listen to the passage and ask them to look at the book to know the main ideas. - T: Ask them : (?) What does Dr Lai say to Minh ? - T: Explain some new words in the text. Then let them listen and repeat the words twice .. –e –d –b –a –c –f. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. 3. Listen and read. - Ss: listen and guess.. - Ss: listen to the passage. - Ss: answer the teacher’s question. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. Then listen and repeat the words threes times. * New words - surgery (n) : phòng khám - check (v) : kiểm tra - smile at (v) : mỉm cười với ai - serious (adj) : trầm trọng - pleased (adj) : hài lòng. * Now complete the story. - Ss: read through the passage and then - T: Have them read through the passage complete the story. and find the appropriate words in the - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. text to fill the spaces . * Practice.(15’).

(191) - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their completed story in front of the class. - T: Listen and remark . Then give the correct answers.. - Ss: read their completed story in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer key. Minh is very nervious and Dr Lai notices this. She smiles at Minh and tells him not to worry. She explains one of his teeth has a cavity . He has to brush them regularly. After Dr Lai fills his tooth, Minh leaves. He is very pleased. 4. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Use the words to help you. - Ss: look at the book and listen to the teacher’s explain. - Ss: practice in pairs.. - T: Ask them to look at the section 4 on page 105. - T: Have them practice in pairs depending on the model. - T: Go around the class to help them if necessary. - T: Call on some pairs to practice before the class. Others look at the pictures and prepare the some dialogue as the model dialogue. - T: Listen, remark and give the correct answers.. - Ss: practice in front of the class.. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * Suggested dialogues. b. Minh is nervous. Why ? Because he’s seeing the dentist c. The cavity is not serious. Why ? Because it’s small . d. Minh is happy. Why ? Because his teeth are Ok. * 5. Write. Complete this poster with a partner. Take care of your teeth - Ss: look at the section B5..

(192) - Ss: listen to the teacher’s explain. * Production.(8’) - T: Come on asking the students to look at section 5 on page 106. - Ss: work in groups. - T: Introduce : This is a picture about taking care of the teeth. You work in groups and discuss about the things which We should do or shouldn’t do to protect the health of the teeth. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. - T: Divide the class into 4 groups. + Group 1,2 makes a list the things - Ss: listen and correct if necessary. should do. DO DON’T + Group 3,4 makes a list the things - brush teeth - use an old shouldn’t do. after meals. tooth brush. - T: Call on some students from the - see a dentist. - eat too much groups to stand up and give their - use a tube of candy. answers in front of the class. toothpaste. - forget to - T: Listen and remark if necessary. …………....... brush teeth. ……………... ……………... c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. - Ss: Listen and remember. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to do exercise 4 in the - Ss: Write in the exercise book. workbook on page 65. - Ask them to write a list about things should or shouldn’t do to keep the healthy teeth in their exercise book. - Prepare the next period “ Unit 11 A/ A check – up.” A1 before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 04/02/2014. Date of teaching: 06/02/2014 - Class 7A,C,B..

(193) PERIOD 66. UNIT 11 KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY LESSON 1 : A/ A CHECK - UP (A1). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to give order/ instructions; understand and follow the doctor’s instruction during a check up and talk about one’s height, weight. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) - T: Call students go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions : (?) What do you have to keep your healthy teeth ? ……………………………………... ……………………………………… - T: Remark and get points .. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do. * Warm – up.(2’) - T: In the last period, you have learnt about the personal hygiene and take care of the teeth. In this period, We continue learning more about the topic “ health” medical check up and common diseases .. - Ss: Listen.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.(10’) - T: Ask them to look at the picture of section A1 on page 107 and ask them some suggested questions : 1. Who are they in the picture ? 2. Where are they ? 3. What do you think they are doing ?. 1. Listen.Then practice with a partner. - Ss: Look at the picture and answer the teacher’s questions. ->They are Lan, Hoa and Nga. -> They’re in the dentist’s surgery.

(194) - T: Introduce : The students of Quang Trung School is having a medical check up. Can you guess what they will do in a check up ? - T: Let them listen to the tape once. - T: Introduce and explain some new words in the text.. -> They’re having a medical check up. - Ss: listen.. - Ss: listen to the tape once. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words + medical check up (n) buổi khám sức khỏe + medical record (n) : phiếu khám sức khỏe + take one’s temperature (v) đo nhiệt độ + height (n) : chiều cao + measure (v) : đo + weigh (v) : cân + scales (n) : cái cân - Ss: listen and repeat the words and then read the words in front of the class.. - T: Ask them to listen and repeat the words following the teacher twice and then call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation. - T: Come on explaining the new structure and ask them to give some examples using it. - Ss: listen and write. * New structure. Would you + V , please ? * Practice.(15’) Ex: - T: Let them listen to the dialogue again Would you open your mouth ? twice. - T: Ask them to practice in pairs. - Ss: listen to the dialogue twice - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: Listen and correct if necessary. - T: Explain the request of the exercise “ Now answer. Number the sentences. Using the information are given in the dialogue , you’ve practiced , you put the following sentences in the right order. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Listen , remark and give the correct. * Now answer. Number the sentences. - Ss: listen to the request. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their answers in front of the.

(195) answers.. class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Production.(8’). * Answer keys. - T: Hang the card board on the board with an a.- 6 b.- 8 c.- 3 d.- 2 exercise “ Choose the best answer to e.- 5 f.- 1 g.- 4 h.- 7 complete these sentences”. 1. Students of Quang Trung School are having a ………. check up. a. medicine b. medium c. medical 2. I need to …….your temperature . a. take b. make c. do 3. You have to ……in the form first. a. feel b. fill c. felt 4. The doctor measured you because she wanted to know your ……… a. high b. weigh c. height. - Ss: Look at the board to do exercise.. - T: Call 2 students go to the board to do exercise. Others look at the board and remark. - T: Remark and give the correct answers.. - Ss: go to the board and do exercise.. c. Consolidation(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen, correct and write. * Answers. 1–c 2–a 3–b 4–c. d. Guide the homework(2’) - Ss: Listen and remember. - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and new structure. - Read the dialogue again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Ss: Write in the exercise book. - Do exercise 1 in the workbook on page 67. - Prepare the new lesson “ A2,3” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………..

(196) + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 05/02/2014.. PERIOD 67. Date of teaching: 07/02/2014 - Class 7B,A,C.. UNIT 11 KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY LESSON 2 : A/ A CHECK - UP (A2,3). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to listen and complete the dialogue . At the same time , practice in pairs completing medical record in English. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDU Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) - T: Call students go to the board to write the new words in the last period. - T: call on some students to remark. - T: Remark and get points. Students’ activities - Ss: rewrite the new words in the lass period. * Answers. + medical check up (n) buổi khám sức khỏe + medical record (n) : phiếu khám sức khỏe + take one’s temperature (v) đo nhiệt độ + height (n) : chiều cao + measure (v) : đo + weigh (v) : cân + scales (n) : cái cân.

(197) * Warm - up.(2’) - T: ask ss to some questions (?) Have you ever seen a doctor? (?) What questions did the doctor ask you?. => Yes, I have. => name, weight , height and fill in the medical record. - Ss: listen.. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Pre – listening.(8’) - T: Ask them to look at the picture in section A2 on page 108. - Ask them some suggested questions (?) Who are they in the picture ? (?) What is Hoa doing ? - T: Ask them to read silently the dialogue and guess the missing words - T: Guide : This is the dialogue between Hoa and the doctor. However some words are missing. You listen to it and find out the missing words to complete the dialogue. * While – listening.(15’) - T: Let them listen to the tape three times and ask them to listen and find out the missing words. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to give their answers before the class. - T: Let them listen to the tape at last time and provide the correct answers. *Tape transcript Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ? Hoa : Fourteen. Doctor : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ? Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter. The. 2. Listen. Then write the missing words. - Ss: Look at the picture and answer the teacher’s questions => They are Hoa and doctor. => Hoa is having a medical check up. - Ss: read the dialogue and guess the missing words. - Ss: listen to the teacher’s guide.. - Ss: listen to the tape three times and complete the dialogue. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers before the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. ask, How, your, 50, shorter, me tall, meter, centimeters, will, nurse, height, think, No, form..

(198) nurse measured me. Doctor : Oh. How tall are you ? Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters. Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How heavy are you ? Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms. Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms. - T: Explain and review the structure which asking about the height and weight. * Post – listening.(10’) - T: Ask them to look at section A3 and explain the request of exercise “ Now you work in pairs : one of you is A and other is B. Look at your copy of the medical record and cover the other copy in turn . A ask B about the missing information and complete the record. - T: Ask them to look at the information in the record. - T: Ask them to practice in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs work in front of the class. - T: Listen , remark and give some suggested questions.. - Ss: listen and remember. How tall + be + S ? heavy. 3. Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: look at the information in the record. - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: work in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Suggested answers. A + Which class is he in ? + What’s his surname ? + Where does he live ? + What is his height ? + What is his weight ? B + Which school does he go to ? + What are his forenames ? + How old is he ? - Ss: Listen and remember. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson.

(199) + Sum up the structures are asked about the height and weight.. - Ss: Write in the exercise book.. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the structures in the lesson. - Do exercise 2,3,4 on page 69 and 70 in the workbook. - Prepare the new lesson “ B1” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 10/02/2014. Date of teaching : 12/02/2014, Class 7B,7A,7C.. PERIOD 68 UNIT 11 KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY LESSON 3 : B/ WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU? (B1) 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to ask and answer about health conditions; say about describe simply about the health. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. Preparation. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Checking the previous lesson(5’). one’s.

(200) - T: Call some students go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions : (?) What is your height ? (?) How heavy are you ? (?) ……………………………… - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(2’) - T: ask ss to some questions (?) Were you absent in your class? (?) Why was you absent ?. - Ss: Go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions => It’s one meter 62 centimeters. => I’m 56 kilos. => ……………………………... - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. => Yes, I was. => Because, I was six.. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. New lesson. * Presentation.(13’) - T: Ask students to look at the picture in section B1 on page 110. - T: Ask them some suggested questions: (?) Who do you think they are in the picture ? Now look at the balloon 1: Lan was not there. She was absent. What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan ? Let’s look at the balloon 2 and answer : What was wrong with her ? - T: Introduce : We are going to listen to the conversation between Lan and Mr. Tan. Yesterday Lan was sick. You listen and find out the structures which are used to talk about health.. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. - T: Look at the picture and answer the teacher’s questions. => They are Lan and Mr. Tan, her teacher.. - Ss: listen.. - T: Let them listen to the tape the first time and ask them to listen and look at the book. - Ss: Listen to the tape - T: Introduce the questions which asking and answering about the health by giving an example: - Ss: listen and write. What was wrong with you, Nam ? I had a bad cold. * New structures. What is/was the matter ? What is/ was wrong ? - T: Ask them to give some examples S + have/has + name of illness.

(201) using the structures. - T: Come on introducing some new words in the lesson.. had - Ss: give the examples. - Ss: listen and write. * New words. + a bad cold (n): cảm lạnh + a headache (n): đau đầu + sick (adj): ốm + sick note (n): giấy ốm, giấy xin phép - Ss: listen and repeat the new words.. - T: Let them listen and repeat the new words twice following the teacher. - T: Call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. - Ss: read the words again. * Practice.(15’) - T: Let them listen to the conversation the second time . - T: Ask them to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: Call on some typical pairs to practice it in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Guide the students : Now look at “Now answer” and answer the questions. - T: Have them compare their answers with their partners. - T: Call on some students to give their answers . Others listen and remark. - T: Listen, remark and give the correct answers. * Production.(5’) - T: ask ss to make the same dialogue.. - Ss: listen to the dialogue. - Ss: work it in front of the class. * Now answer. - Ss: listen. - Ss: compare their answers with their partners. - Ss: give their answers - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. a. Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she had a bad cold . b. She had a headache. c. Mr. Tan told Lan to stay inside at recess. d. The doctor said that Lan had a virus. e. The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note . - Ss: practice in pairs. - Ss: practice in front of the class..

(202) - T: call ss to stand up to practice - T: correct mistakes if necessary. c. Consolidation (3’) - Ss: Listen and remember. - Repeat the content of the lesson : + the structures : asking and answering about the health + Name of illness. d.Homework.(2’) - Ss: Write in the exercise book. - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and new structures. - Do exercise 1 in the workbook on page 71. - prepare the new lesson “B2,3” before going to school.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 11/02/2014.. PERIOD 69. Date of teaching : 13/02/2014, Class 7A,7C,7D. UNIT 11 KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY LESSON 4 : B/ WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU? (B2). 1. Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about the healthy and common illness. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school..

(203) 3. Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) - T: Call some students go to the board to write the new words in the last period. - T: Call on some others to remark and correct if necessary. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(2’). Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to write the new words in the last period. * Answers. + a bad cold (n): cảm lạnh + a headache (n): đau đầu + sick (adj): ốm + sick note (n): giấy ốm, giấy xin phép. - T: Let them play “ Network” about the - Ss: Play “Network” common illness. Common - T: Write “ Network” on the board and ask illness them to work in pairs to find out the information about the common illness. flu cold - T: Call on some students to give their answers. - T: Look at the board to remark if headache necessary.. toothache. - Ss: listen.. * 2. Take a survey. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. New lesson. * Presentation.(5’) - T: Ask them to look at the section B2 on page 111.. - Ss: look at the section B2 Name Ba Cold V Flu Headache Stomachache Toothache - Ss: listen.. - T: Introduce : This is a survey about the students’ health. Now you work in groups. - Ss: work with the teacher..

(204) of 4 students in turn asking and answering the given questions to complete the survey. - T: Make the model by some suggested questions with one or two students. - Ss: work in group of four. * Practice.(15’) - T: Let them work in groups of 4 to complete the table on the board and omit the name column. - T: Call on some representatives from each group to read aloud their groups’ results to whole class.. - Ss: work in front of the class. S1 : Were you ever absent from school last semester, Ba ? Ba : Yes, I was. S1 : Were you sick ? Ba : Yes, I was. S1 : Did you have flu ? Ba : No, I didn’t. I had a bad cold. - Ss: answer the questions.. - T: Ask them to answer the question : (?) What was the most common illness ?. 3. Listen . Complete the table. - Ss: listen.. * Production.(10’) - T: Come on introducing : “ We are going to listen to the report which telling you the day’s absence due to sickness of 7A, you listen to it and complete the table by writing the days in each column. - T: Have them listen to the tape once. - T: Let them listen to it again and complete the table. - T: Ask them to complete their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers. Others listen and remark. - T: Play the tape again for the students to check their answers. - T: Give the correct answers.. - Ss: listen to the tape and complete the table. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers.. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. Tape transcript Days lost through sickness in class 7A Last semester in class 7A, there was a total last semester of 112 day’s absence due to sickness. The Cold 10 total breaks down as follows : most Flu 43 absences – 43 – were due to flu. Then came Stomachache 37.

(205) stomach problems with 37. Toothache came next with 17. Colds accounted for 10 absences. Finally, headaches caused 5 day’s absence.. Headache Toothache. 5 17 Total days lost 112. - T: Explain some new words in the listening. - T: Let them listen and repeat the words twice and then call some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation.. - Ss: write in the exercise book.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson : the name of common illness.. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Ss: listen and repeat the new words twice. * New words. - total (n) : tổng số - absence (n) : sự vắng mặt - due to (v) : bởi vì, vì. d. Homework.(2’) - Ss: Write in the exercise book. - Ask the to learn by heart the new words. - Do exercises 2,3 in the work book on page 72 and 73. - Prepare the new lesson “ B4,5” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 12/02/2014. Date of teaching : 14/02/2014, Class 7B,7A,7C.

(206) PERIOD 70. UNIT 11 KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY LESSON 5 : B/ WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU? (B4). 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to understand and know more about the common cold ( Which there are a lot of people have a cold every year. ) symptoms ; runny nose ; fever … b. b.Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson.(5’) - T: Call students go to the board to - Ss: Go to the board to do correct exercise in the workbook on page 72 and 73. - T: Call some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(3’) - T: Let students play “ Rub out and remember”. - T: Write the name of the common illness on the board. Let them read some times to remember. - T: Rub out the English words and ask them to look at the Vietnamese words and read the English words again Which are rub out. - T: Call on some students to go to the board to rewrite these English words. - T: Look at the board and remark. - T: Let them read the words again. b. New lesson. * Pre – reading.(12’) - T: Ask students some suggested questions :. - T: Play “ Rub out and Remember” + have a cold : bị cảm lạnh + flu : bệnh cúm + stomachache : đau bụng + coughing : ho + headache : đau đầu + toothache : đau răng. 4. Read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: Answer the teacher’s questions -> The common cold.

(207) (?) Among the diseases you learnt do you know which disease is the most common ? - T: Ask them to look at the picture in section B4 and ask : (?) Do you know what symptoms of the common cold ? - T: Introduce and explain more some new words in the text.. - Ss: look at the picture and answer -> Yes, I do - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words - symptoms (n) triệu chứng - a runny nose (n) sổ mũi - a slight fever (n) sốt nhẹ - cough (v) ho - sneeze (v) hắt hơi - common (adj) thong thường - catch (v) mắc, nhiễm bệnh - cure (v) chữa bệnh,p2chữa bệnh - medicine (n) thuốc - relieve (v) làm dịu, làm bớt đau - disappear (adj) biến mất - prevent (v) phòng tránh - Ss: listen and repeat the new words. - Ss: read the words again.. - T: Have them listen and repeat the new words twice following the teacher. - T: Call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation. * While – reading. - T: Guide the students : You are going to read a passage about the common cold. You read and answer the questions below the text. - T: Ask ss to read silently the passage and answer the questions. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Go around the class to help them if necessary. - T: Call on some students to answer the questions before the class and others listen and remark. - T: Remark, correct and give the correct answers.. - Ss: Listen and do as the teacher requests : - Ss: read the passage silently and answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Correct answers. a. We call the common cold because every year millions of people catch it..

(208) b. they are a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and sneezing. c. No, there is no cure for the common cold. d. No, these medicines don’t cure a cold, but they relieve the symptoms. e. We can prevent a cold by eating well, doing exercise, keeping fit and staying healthy. *5. Play with words.(Optional ) - Ss: Play “ Brain storming” * Post – reading. - T: Ask them to close their books and play “ Brain storming” in groups to make a list about the things mentioned to the common cold ( symptoms ; the prevention ) - T: Call on some students to repeat the symptoms of the common cold. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary. c. Consolidation(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: repeat the symptoms of the common cold. - Ss: listen and correct if necessary.. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Ss: Write in the exercise book.. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words. - Rewrite and learn by heart the symptoms of the common cold. - Do exercise 4 in the workbook on page 73. - Prepare the next period “ TEST 45’ * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:………………………………………………………………...

(209) =============================================. Date of preparing: 17/02/2014. Date of teaching : 19/02/2014 Class 7A,7C,B. PERIOD 71 : WRITTEN TEST Time : 45 munites 1.Aim. a. Knowledge :Help students review parts grammar structures and vocabulary from unit 9 to unit 11 and get mark b. Skills : pay attention to writing , listening and reading skills . c. Education : honest and to be faithful 2. Question : CHỦ ĐỀ. LANGUAGE CONTENT. A.Matrix. NHẬN BIẾT. THÔNG HIỂU. 5câu =3điểm = 30 % Read the passage, then write T or F in the boxes 5 câu = 3điểm = 30 %. WRITING. CỘNG. Choose the best anwer with a, b, or c 5 câu = 3điểm = 30 %. READING. VẬN DỤNG. 5 câu = 3điểm = 30 %. Put the words in the right order 4 câu = 4điểm = 40%. 5câu =5điểm = 50.

(210) % Tổng số câu Tổng số điểm Tỉ lệ %. 5 câu = 3điểm = 30 %. 9 câu = 7điểm = 70 %. I.. 15 câu = 10 điểm = 100%. Choose the best anwer with a, b, or c (3 points): 1. He often …………… volleyball in the afternoon. a. play b. to play c. plays 2. Last summer we ……………… Ha Long Bay. a. visit b. visited c. visits 3. I need to ……………………. your temperature. a. take b. listen c. do 4. What was wrong …………… you? – I had a headache. a. for b. with c. on 5. They will …………….. to Ha Noi next month. a. went b. goes c. go II.Read the passage, then write T or F in the boxes (3 points): Last summer, Lien went to Nha Trang with her family. They stayed in a hotel near the beach. They had meals in a small restaurant. They took a lot of photographs. They stayed there two days and then they came back to Hue three days later. 1. Last summer, Lien went to Nha Trang with her friends. 2. They had meals in a small restaurant. 3. They stayed Nha Trang three days. 4. They took a lot of photographs. 5. They came back to Hue two days later. III.Put the words in the right order ( 4 points): 1. Listen / they/ music / everyday / to. ………………………………………………………………………………… 2. plays / he / soccer. ………………………………………………………………………………… 3. had / a / I / bad cold. ………………………………………………………………………………… 4.shouldn’t / a lot of / we / sweets / eat. …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Key and Mark : * Question I : I. ( 5 x 0,6 = 3 points ) 1. c. 3. a.

(211) 2. b. 4. b 5. c. II. ( 5 x 0,6 = 3 points ) 1. F 4. T 2. T 5. F 3. F IV. ( 4 x 1 = 4 points ) 1. They listen to music everyday . 2. He plays soccer . 3. I had a bad cold 4. We shouldn’t eat a lot of sweets . 5. Nhung will visit Da Lat next summer * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 17/02/2013. Date of teaching : 20/02/2013 Class 7A,7C,B. PERIOD 72 : CORRECT THE TEST 1.Aim..

(212) a. Knowledge: -At the end of the lesson students will be able to check and correct their mistakes b. Skills : writing skills c. Education :educate students to correct the mistakes to each other 2. Preparations : a.Teacher : book and lesson plan b.Students : book .note book 3. The stages of the lesson a. Greet and check attendance: Class 7A : 36 / 36 Class 7B : 37 / 37 * Warm up : ( 1’ ) Today we will correct the test . Now let’s start the lesson . b . New lesson : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Question (8’) ? Who can repeat the questions ? repeat I. Choose the best answer with a,b or c : II. Read the passage then write T or F III. Put the words in the right order 2. Suggeted idea (8’) Speak out Ask Ss to give out the suggetion ideas Give the comments on the result of the Sts' written test in general: Most of you understood the questions and knew how to answer them. You also knew how to do a written test and some of you have prepared well for the test. Besides, some of you didn't learn well for the test so you still made mistakes especially in grammar, structures and even vocabulary.. 3. Comment (8’) Listen and remember. 4.Correct the basic mistakes (8’) ask Sts to give out the answers for the questions in the test again. Give - listen to the teacher. feedback, correct mistakes and remind them of the grammar - do the task, give out the answers for the vocabulary and structures. question.

(213) - give feedback and have Sts review some grammar and vocabulary in this part:. 5.Give out the mark (8’) 7A Excellent 2 Fair 6 Better 22 Poor 7. 7B 6 8 18 5. 7C. c. Consolidation(3’) Let Ss correct the mistakes to each other d. Home work :(2’) Do written test again Prepare : unit 12 (A1,A2) 4* REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 18/02/2014. Date of teaching: 21/02/2014 - Class 7A,B,C.. PERIOD 73 UNIT 12 LET’S EAT! LESSON 1: A/ WHAT SHALL WE EAT? (A1,2).

(214) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to say about the common food as meat , vegetables ,seafood .At the same they can review some structures as : Let’s ; too/ so ; either /neither. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(7’) - T: Call students go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions (?) Did you have the common cold? (?) What are the symptoms of the common cold ?. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(1’) - T: Let the students play “Networks” about the name of food and drink or fruits. - T: Divide the class into 2 teams. - T: Which team has more correct words, is winner.. - Ss: play “Networks” - Ss: divide into teams..

(215) longan. - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. pea. carrot. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.(15’) - T: Ask the students some suggested questions to introduce the topic of the lesson. (?)Have you ever gone to the market? (?) What food do you usually see and buy at the market ? - T: Introduce : Yesterday Hoa and her aunt went to market. Can you guess what they bought ? - T: Let them look at the pictures on page 114 and 115. - T: Let them listen to the tape A1 once . Ask them to listen and find out some new words in the text. - T: Write the new words on the board.. pork. FOOD. papaya. chicken. bananas pineapple. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. 1. Listen and read . Then practice with a partner . - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions.. - Ss: listen and guess. - Ss: look at the pictures. - Ss: listen to the tape and find out the new words. - Ss: look at the board and write. - T: Let them listen and repeat the words * New words twice. - meat stall (n) : quầy bán thịt - T: Call some students read the words again - pork (n) : thịt lợn to check their pronunciation. - vegetable stall (n) : quầy bán rau - hate (v) : gét - T: Come on explain new structure in the - spinach (n) : rau cải chân vịt text. Ask them to give some examples using - cucumber (n): quả dưa chuột the new structure. - Papaya (n) : quả đu đủ - pineapple (n): quả dứa - smell (v) : ngửi - ripe (adj) : chín.

(216) - green (adj) : xanh - durian (n) quả sầu riêng - Ss: listen and repeat the words twice. - Ss: read the words again in front of the class.. * Practice.(10’) - T: Let them listen to the dialogue twice or three times - T: Have them practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class. - T: Listen and correct if necessary.. - T: Come on asking them to look at the part “ Now answer. What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market ? Write a list in your exercise book.” - T: Have them compare their answer with a partner. - T: Call on some students to answer the question in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary.. - Ss: write and give some examples. * New structure. + Diễn tả sự đồng tình khẳng định To and So : cũng Too : đứng ở cuối câu. So + do/does + S. + am/ is/ are + S. Example Lan is a student. I am a student, too. or So am I. + Diễn tả câu đồng tình phủ định. Either and Neither : cũng Either : đứng ở cuối câu. Neither + do/ does + S. + am/ is/ are + S. Example Mai doesn’t like pork. I don’t like pork, either. or Neither do I.. - Ss: listen and repeat the dialogue three times. - Ss: practice it in pairs. - Ss: work it in front of the class. - Ss: listen and correct if necessary * Now answer. What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market ? write a list in your exercise book..

(217) - Ss: look at the “Now answer” and do exercise.. * Production.(7’) - T: ask ss to use “too, so ,either and neither”. - T: use the model sentences to ask the students and Have them answer aloud. - T: Let them work in pairs talk about the different food which they like and dislike. - T: Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the question in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer key. Hoa and her aunt bought some beef, some spinach, some cucumbers and some oranges. 2. Ask and answer questions with a partner. Talk about the food you like - Ss: listen. - Ss: practice the model with the teacher.. - T: Give some more fruit.. - T: Let them listen and repeat the words twice following the teacher. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. + The name of the food. + the new structure. d. Guide the homework.(2’). - Ss: work in pairs. - Ss: practice in front of the class. * Example S1: I like pineapples. Do you like them ? S2: - Yes, I like pineapples, too - Yes, so do I - No, I don’t like pineapples. - No, I don’t. - Ss: listen and write in the book. * Some fruit. - grape fruit (n) quả bưởi - strawberry (n) quả dâu tây - water – melon (n) quả dưa hấu - pear (n) quả lê - longan (n) quả nhãn - mango (n) quả xoài.

(218) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and new structure. - Reread the dialogue again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1,2 on page 74 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A3,4” before going to school.. - Ss: listen and repeat the words twice.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 24/02/2014. Date of teaching: 26/02/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. PERIOD 74 UNIT 12 LET’S EAT! LESSON 2: A/ WHAT SHALL WE EAT? (A3,4) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know how to prepare the meal ; Write a passage which telling about the food and drink for the meal. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school..

(219) 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(3’) - T: Call some students to go to the board to match the English words in Column A with their meanings in Column B. - T: Call on some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points.. * Warm - up.(2’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Pre - reading.(10’) - T: ask ss to look at the pictures and ask them some question. (?) What are they doing ? - T: Guide : You’ll read a passage which describing the work of Hoa and her aunt to prepare a meal. - TL: Ask them to read the passage quickly and find some words in it. - T: Write them on the board and explain the meanings of the new words.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise. A 1. pork 2. cucumber 3. spinach 4. papaya 5. pineapple 1. – e 3. – a 5. – c - Ss: listen.. B a. cải chân vịt b. quả đu đủ c. quả dứa d. quả dưa chuột e. thịt lợn 2. – d 4. – b. 3. Read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: look at the pictures and answer => They are cooking a meal. - Ss: listen to the teacher. - Ss: read the passage quickly and find out the new words. - Ss: write in the exercise book. * New words. - slice (v) thái - boil (v) luộc - add (v) thêm - taste (v) nếm - stir – fry (v) xào - heat (v) làm nóng - green pepper (n) ớt xanh - salt (n) muối - pan (n) cái chảo - soy sauce (n) nước xì dầu - dish (n) món ăn - cucumber salad (n) món salad - plate (n) cái đĩa.

(220) - T: Let them listen and repeat the words twice following the teacher. - T: Call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation.. - chopstick (n) cái đũa - spoon (n) cái thìa - Ss: listen and repeat the new words twice following the teacher. - Ss: read the words again in front of the class.. * While - reading.(15’) - T: Ask them to read the text again carefully and answer the questions in section a. - T: Have them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to give their menu in front of the class. - T: Listen, correct and give the right menu.. a. Answer the questions. - Ss: read the passage again and do exercise. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their Menu in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. MENU - Cucumber salad with onions - Boiled spinach - Stir – fried beef with green peppers and onions - Rice. - T: Come on asking them to look at the section b. and complete the instructions. - T: Have them work in pairs. - T: Call on some students to give their answers. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Listen, correct and then ask them to match the instructions with the pictures. - T: Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class. - T: Remark, correct and give the right answers.. b. Here is the recipe Hoa’s aunt used. Add the missing verbs. Then match the instructions to the pictures. - Ss: look at the section b, and complete the introductions. - Ss: compare with a partner. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. - Ss: correct and match the introductions with the pictures. - Ss: give their answers. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the.

(221) exercise book. * Add the missing verbs. 1. slice 2. slice 3. heat 4. stir – fry 5. add 6. boil 7. add * Match the instructions to the pictures. 1. – C 2. – F 3. – A 4. – D 5. – B 6. – E 7. – G * Post - reading.(10’) - T: Ask students to look at the section A4 on page upload.123doc.net. - T: Explain the request of the section. Ask them to write sentences about What they had for breakfast, lunch and dinner. - T: Go around the class to help the students if necessary. - T: Let them compare their answer with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud to the whole class. - T: Make corrections if necessary. - T: Ask them to practice in pairs: asking and answering with the model (?) What did you have for breakfast ? - T: Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - T: Listen and remark.. - T: Let them listen to the tape of section A5 to review the knowledge they’ve learnt in the lesson.. 4. Write. What did you eat and drink yesterday ? - Ss: look at the section A4 - Ss: listen to the teacher’s explain and do exercise.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their answers in front of the class. - Ss: practice in pairs: asking and answering with the model. - Ss: work in front of the class. * Example. S1: What did you eat and drink for breakfast yesterday ? S2: I ate some noodles and drink some water. *5. Play with words. - Ss: listen to the tape..

(222) - T: Explain some new words and Let them listen and repeat the new words twice.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson : + The structures : so, too, either and neither. + The verbs to prepare a meal, the name of the items are used in meal.. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. - healthy food (n) thức ăn bổ dưỡng - team (v) hấp - balanced meal (n) bữa ăn cân bằng - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words. - Do exercises 3,4 on page 74 in the - Ss: Listen and write in the workbook. workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================= Date of preparing: 25/03/2014 Date of teaching: 27/03/2014 - Class 7A,B,C.. PERIOD 75 UNIT 12 LET’S EAT! LESSON 3: B/ OUR FOOD (B1) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more some diseases causing from the food which not clean. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson..

(223) 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(7’) - T: Call students go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions : What did you have for dinner yesterday ? ………………………………….. - Remark and get points.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions.. * Warm – up.(1’) - T: Ask some questions to introduce the topic of the lesson. - Ss: Answer the teacher’s questions (?) Were you ever absent from school last semester ? (?) Were you sick ? (?) did you have the flu ? a cold ? a stomachache ? a toothache ? a headache ? - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.(10’) 1. Listen. Then practice with a - T: Ask the students to look at the partner. picture in section B1 and answer the - Ss: look at the picture and answer the teacher’s question : teacher’s questions. (?) Where is Ba ? (?) Can you guess what’s wrong with him ? (?) Now tell me what causes stomachache ? - T: Introduce : You’re going to listen to.

(224) the conversation between Ba and the doctor at the surgery. Ba had an awful stomachache. You listen and answer the question : Why did Ba have a stomachache ? - T: Let them listen to the dialogue twice and ask them to answer the question. - T: Call on some pairs to give their answer. - T: Introduce and explain some new words and structures in the lesson.. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: listen to the dialogue and answer the question. - Ss: answer the question in front of the class. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New structure. + Cấu trúc phỏng đoán. - It must be ….. chắc hẳn là - It is/ was probably …. Chắc có thể là. * Practice.(15’). Example It must be something you ate It was probably the spinach.. - T: Ask them to play the roles of Ba and the doctor to practice the dialogue again. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs. class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary. - Ss: work it in front of the class. - T: Guide : Now you look at the part “ Now you complete the story using the information in the dialogue. - T: Ask them to read the dialogue again to do exercise. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some pairs to read aloud their completed story. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary. And then give the corrected answers.. * Now complete the story. - Ss: listen and do the exercise. “Complete the story”. - Ss: read the dialogue again and do the exercise - Ss: compare their answers with a partner - Ss: read aloud their completed story. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. (1) doctor (2) sick (3) asked (4) had.

(225) (5) spinach (6) wash (7) more carefully (8)Vegetables (9) make (10) She (11) medicine. * Production.(7’) - T: Ask the students: Besides the stomachache which illness can cause from the food allergies ? - T: Have them discuss to avoid the stomachache and other food related diseases. (?) What should we do and what shouldn’t we do ? ** Sum up Hygienic food is very important. Especially for our health, so we need hygiene well before preparing the meal.. - Ss: answer the teacher’s question.. - Ss: Discuss in groups. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the dialogue. - Do exercises 1,2 on page 76 and 77 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B2,3” before going to school.. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 26/03/2014. Date of teaching: 28/03/2014 - Class 7A,B,C.

(226) PERIOD 76 UNIT 12 LET’S EAT! LESSON 4: B/ OUR FOOD (B2,3) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to understand the importance of the food for the people’s health and know the suitable meal, a balanced diet and how to know a menu. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(7’). Students’ activities. - T: Call some students go to the board - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise. to correct exercise 2 in the workbook on page 77. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(1’) - T: Ask students some suggested questions : (?) What is your favorite food ? (?) What do you always have for breakfast ? lunch ? dinner ? (?) Do you think your diet is balanced ? (?) Do you know why do we have balance diet? - T: to know we will study this lesson.. - Ss: Answer the teacher’s questions => meat, fish, .......... - Ss: listen..

(227) b. Teaching the new lesson.. 2. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. * Pre – reading.(15’) - T: Introduce : to know whether your diet is balanced or not, you will find the right answer in Today’s lesson. - Ss: listen to the tape. - T: Let them listen to the tape and ask them to listen and look at their books. - T: Introduce the new words in the text. - Ss: listen and write. * New words. - balanced diet(n)chế độ ăn hợp lí - affect (adj) ảnh hưởng - moderate (adj) vừa phải - amount (n) số lượng/ khối lượng - energy (n) năng lượng/ sức lực - body – building (adj) pt’ cơ bắp - dairy product(n)sản phẩm bơ sữa - cereals (n) ngũ cốc - T: Ask them to listen and repeat the new words twice following the teacher. - T: Call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation.. - Ss: listen and repeat the new words twice. - Ss: read the words again.. * While – reading. - T: Ask them to read the passage again to answer “ The questions” below the passage. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers before the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary - T: Correct and give the right answers.. * Answer the questions. - Ss: read the passage again to answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class.. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. + Questions. a. Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy. b. A balanced diet alone is not enough - T: Ask them to look at the section “ all people need exercise to keep a About you” and practice in pairs: asking healthy life..

(228) and answering about themselves.. * Post – reading.(8). + About you. - Ss: practice in pairs: asking and answering about themselves. c. Yes, I think. I have a balanced diet because I eat suitable food in moderate amounts. I never eat any food in a too many a mount, however delicious It may be.. - T: Ask them to look at the section B3. - T: Let them study the pie chart. - T: Explain the request of the exercise “ these are three kinds of the main food. 3. Write a menu. - T: Have them give the name of the - Ss: look at the section B3. food. - Ss: study the pie chart. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - T: Guide the students : Now you write a menu for yourself and your family including details of breakfast; lunch and dinner. Remember to make your meal healthy and balanced. - T: Go around the class to help them if necessary. - T: Call on some students to read their menu in front of the class. - T: Remark and give the suggested answers.. - Ss: give the name of the food. * Suggested answers. - Body building : bread, fish, milk, chicken, eggs. - Energy – giving : honey, candy, cake. - Protective : pineapple, spinach, tomato. - Ss: listen.. - Ss: read aloud their “Menu” in front of the class.. c. Consolidation.(3’). * Suggested answers. Breakfast : + Food : eggs, bread, noodles with beef, chicken, pork. + Drink : milk, fruit juice. Lunch : + Food : rice, cooked or fried fish, cooked pork or stir-fried pork with bean, vegetables soup or salad. + Drink : tea, fruit juice..

(229) - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to read the passage again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 3,4 in the workbook on page 78. - Prepare the next period “ B4,5” before going to school.. Dinner : + Food : rice ……… + Drink : milk, fruit juice…. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 03/03/2014. Date of teaching: 05/03/2014 - Class 7A,B,C.

(230) PERIOD 77 UNIT 12 LET’S EAT! LESSON 5: B/ OUR FOOD (B4,5) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about the through listening and matching the pictures. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the new lesson.(7’) - T: Call some students go to the board to talk about the importance of sugar. - Listen, remark and get points.. Students’ activities - T: Go to the boars to talk about the importance of sugar.. * Warm – up.(1’) - T: Let the students play “ Brainstorming” about a balanced diet. - T: Ask them to work in groups. - T: Call on some students to give their information about a balanced diet. - T: Listen and correct if necessary. - T: Come on introducing the content of the lesson. b. Teacher the new lesson. * Pre – listening.(10’). - Ss: Play game “ Brainstorming ” - Ss: work in groups. - Ss: give the information about a balanced diet.. - Ss: listen.. food.

(231) - T: Ask them to look at the section B4 and call the name of the food in the pictures. - T: Repeat the name of the food in English. - T: Call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. - T: Guide : You are going to listen to the tape about Lan, Ba, Nga and Hoa. You listen and tell what they ate and drank among the food and drinks mentioned above by writing the letter a, b, …… next to each person corresponding with the food and drinks they used. * While – listening.(12’) - T: Let them listen to the tape three times and ask them to do exercise. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Let them listen to the tape the last time and give the correct answers. ** Tape transcript** For her lunch, Lan had beef with noodles and vegetables. She had juice too. Ba chose fish and rice and some fruit. He drank some water. Nga ate rice and vegetables and drank juice. Hoa had noodles and some fruit. She ha juice, too. * Post – listening.(10’) - T: Let them play game “ Rub out and remember” with the food in the listening. - T: Call on some students to go to the board to write the name of these food again. - T: Look at the board and remark ( Can give the marks if the students have the more correct words.). 4. Listen and write the letters of what they ate and drank. - Ss: look the pictures and call the name of the food. - Ss: repeat the food in English. - Ss: read the words again. - Ss: listen to the teacher. a. rice b. noodles c. fish d. vegetables. e. fruit f. beef g. juice h. water. - Ss: listen to the tape three times and do exercise. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen to the tape at last, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. Lan : b, d, f, g. Ba : c, a, e, h. Nga : a, d, g. Hoa : b, e, g.. * Play“ Rub out and Remember” - Ss: play “ Rub out and remember”. - Ss: go to the board to do exercise.

(232) * Answer keys. rice gạo fruit hoa quả noodles phở/ mì tôm beef thịt bò fish cá - T: Let them listen to the tape B5. juice nước hoa quả - T: Ask them listen and repeat the tape in vegetables rau chorus at the same time to practice the water nước knowledge which they have just learnt in the lesson. * 5 Play with words. - Ss: listen to the tape B5. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Ss: listen and repeat. - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to write a menu for dinner of their family. - do exercises 1,2 in “TEST YOURSELF” on page 80 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ Language - Ss: Listen and remember. focus 4” before going to school. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 04/03/2014. Date of teaching: 06/03/2014 - Class 7A,B,C.

(233) PERIOD 78. LANGUAGE FOCUS 4. 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to revise all the knowledge which they’ve learnt from Unit 10 to Unit 12 by doing exercises in Language focus 4 b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cardboards, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional) * Warm – up.(1’) - T: Introduce the content of the lesson : In the last periods You have learnt the past simple tense, indefinite quantifiers ; so, too, either and neither ; imperatives . In this period We’ll review the whole the knowledge by doing the exercises in Language focus 4.. Students’ activities. - Ss: Listen to the teacher.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Review the past simple tense.(9’) 1. Past simple tense. - T: Ask the students to repeat the use and the form of the past simple tense. - Ss: repeat the use and form of the past - T: Call on some students to answer the simple tense. teacher’ request. Others listen, remark - Ss: answer the teacher’s question..

(234) and correct if necessary. - T: Ask the students to do exercise 1 “ Answer the questions about yourself by playing the roles in the pictures. - T: Ask them to work in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary.. * Review the indefinite quantifiers. (10’) - T: Have the to look at the pictures in exercise 2 and write the correct expression. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers before the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Correct and give the right answers.. - Ss: do exercise 1 - Ss: work in pairs. - Ss: work in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. *Answers a. Did you do your homework last night ? - No, I didn’t. I watched TV. b. did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ? - No, I didn’t. I ate dinner in a restaurant. c. Did you go to school yesterday? - No, I didn’t. I went to the movie theater yesterday. d. Did you watch a video on the weekend ? - No, I didn’t. I read a book on the weekend. e. Did you play basketball yesterday ? - No, I didn’t. I play football yesterday. 2. Indefinite quantifiers. - Ss: look at the pictures and do exercise a, a. Write the correct expression. - Ss: read aloud their answers in front of the class. - Ss: write in the exercise book. * Correct answers. A : a little coffee B : a lot of tea C : a little sugar D : a lot of salt E : too much coffee b. Complete the dialogues..

(235) - T: Come on : Let them read through the dialogue and ask them to complete the dialogues by using the correct expression. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some pairs to practice their dialogues before the class. Other listen and remark. - T: Listen and correct if necessary.. - Ss: complete the dialogues using the expression. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: practice their completed dialogues in front of the class. - Ss: correct and write in the exercise book. * Correct answers A : a little or a lot Only a little B : a lot of C : too much D : a little. * Review “too and either”(5’) 3. too and either. a. Work with a partner. Read the dialogues. - Ss: listen.. - T: Repeat the use of “Too and So” quickly. - T: Have them practice the dialogue in pairs ( Change the role while practicing ) - Ss: work in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work it before the class. - T: Listen and correct their pronunciation - Ss: work in front of the class. if necessary. - T: Let them look at the pictures of fruit. - T: Explain the request of the exercise 3b “V” is used for like. “X” is used for don’t like. - T: Ask them to look at the pictures and make up similar dialogues with a partner. - T: Call on some pairs to practice their dialogues in front of the class. - T: Listen and correct if necessary.. * Review “So and Neither”(5’) - T: Repeat the use and form of “So and. b. Look at the pictures. Make up similar dialogues with a partner. - Ss: look at the pictures of fruit. - Ss: listen to the teacher. - Ss: make the dialogues with a partner. - Ss: work in front of the class S1: I like corn. S2: I like corn, too. S1: I don’t like spinach. S2: I don’t like spinach, either. ………………………………. ………………………………..

(236) Neither” quickly. - T: Ask them to practice the model dialogues. - T: Call on some pairs to practice them before the class. - T: Come on asking them to look at the pictures in exercise 3b to make eight dialogues with “So and Neither” - T: Call on some pairs to practice their dialogues in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary.. * Review “ Imperatives”(8’) - T: Ask them to look at the words in the box and give the meaning of the verbs. - T: Ask them to use the verbs in the box to complete the instructions to make cucumber salad. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some pairs to read aloud their answers in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the Language focus 4. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to redo all the exercises in Language focus 4 in their exercise book and “ TEST YOUR SELF” in the. 4. so and neither. - Ss: listen. - Ss: work with the teacher. - Ss: work in front of the class.. - Ss: work in front of the class. * Example S1: I like beef. S2: So do I. S1: I don’t like papaya. S2: Neither do I. 5. Imperative - Ss: look at the words and give the meanings of words. - Ss: complete the instructions to make cucumber salad. - Ss: compare their answer with a partner. - Ss: read aloud their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Correct answers. b. Wash c. Slice d. Mix e. Add f. Stir g. Wait - Ss: Listen and remember..

(237) workbook. - Prepare the next period “ Unit 13: A1” before going to school.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing: 04/03/2014 PERIOD 79. Date of teaching: 06/03/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES. LESSON 1: A/ SPORTS (A1,2). 1. Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more some sports which the teenagers in the USA and other countries in all over the world. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. Stages of the leson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson. ( Optional ) * Warm – up.(5’) - T: Organize the whole class play find some one who about the activities in the free time. - T: Ask students to make questions : Yes/No for the words in cross column Example. (?) Do you play sports ? Yes, I do. - T: Have them go around the class and ask their classmates and then fill the. - Ss: play. - Ss: make questions. Find someone who... Name Plays sports. Reads books. Watches TV. Goes out. Learns how to cook..

(238) name in the column name if who fill the Goes to the movies. whole names is winner. - T: Sum up : Playing sports is one of - Ss: listen. the most popular free time activities around the world. In this lesson and in the following ones we’ll learn about this topic. b. New lesson. * Presentation.(12’). 1. Listen and read. - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. - T: Ask them some suggested questions (?) What is your favorite sports ? (?) When do you always play these sports ? (?) Make a list of the sports which you play in your free time ? - T: Ask them to look at the pictures in the section A1 and ask them: (?) Do you recognize these sports ? - T: Ask them to name these sports in English. - T: Introduce and explain some new words.. * Practice.(15’) - T: Guide: You are going to read the result of the survey carried out recently about the most 10 popular sports among American teenagers. You hear and look at the book and find out what ten sports are. - T: Let them listen to the tape A1 twice. - T: Ask them to read by themselves. - T: Ask them : Besides 5 sports you. - Ss: look at the pictures and answer the questions. - Ss: name some sports in English. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words - baseball (n) bóng chày - skateboarding (n) trượt ván - roller-skating (n) trượt patanh ( sử dụng giày có 4 bánh ) - rollerblading (n) trượt patanh ( sử dụng giày có bánh xe nằm dọc dưới đế giày ) Sports Position Baseball 1st Skateboarding 2nd Roller-skating 3rd Rollerblading 4th Basketball 5t Football 6th Volleyball 7th Tennis 8th Badminton 9th Swimming 10th. - Ss: look at the.

(239) know what are the other sports ? - T: Give the correct answers. - T: Call on some students to read aloud the passage. - T: Ask them to look at the questions. - T: Have them practice in pairs about the sports. - T: Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. questions. - Ss: work in front of the class.. - Ss: listen and give the popular sports in Viet Nam. * Production.(8’) - T: You’ve learnt 10 sports which American teenagers like most. (?) Do you think it is the same in Viet Nam ? and which sports is the most popular in Viet Nam ? - T: call on some student to go to the board to write. - T: listen and remark. * Presentation.(10’) - T: Have them look at the section A2 - T: Introduce : This is a survey containing 11 sports. You ask your classmates which sports they like most. Write the number of the students who likes each sport best. Then altogether to see which sports is the most popular in class. The survey question is which sports do you like best ? - T: Go around the class to help them if necessary. - T: Ask them to compare their answers in groups, each group sum up which sports is the most popular. - T: collect the answer of the class and give out the sports which is the most popular. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the name of the 10 sports which the American teenagers enjoy most. d. Homework.(2’). - Ss: write in front of the class.. 2. Take a survey.. Sports soccer badminton volleyball football swimming athletics table tennis basketball roller skating rollerblading baseball. Numbers of Position students.

(240) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and reread the text and translate it Ss: Listen and remember. into Vietnamese. - Do some exercises in the work book. - Prepare the next period “A2,3” before going to school. - Ss: Listen and write in the workbook. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing : 10/03/2014. Date of teaching: 13/03/2014, Class: 7A,B,C. PERIOD 80 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES. LESSON 2: A/ SPORTS (A3,5) 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know the form and use of the adverbs and adjectives; how to change the same form adjectives into adverbs. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. Stages of the leson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson.(5’) - T: Call students go to the board to match the English words in Column A with the Vietnamese meanings in Column B. A B 1. Football a. Trượt patanh. - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise..

(241) 2.Skateboarding b. Bóng chuyền 3. swimming c. Cầu lông 4. Baseball d. Trượt ván 5. Volleyball e. Bóng đá 6. Badminton f. Bơi lội 7. Roller skating g. Bóng chày 1. ….. 2. ….. 3. …… 4. …….. 5. ….. 6. …… 7. ………. * Answers. 1. – e 2. – d 4. – g 5. – b 7. – a. 3. – f 6. – c. - Remark and get points * Warm - up.(2’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. New lesson.. - Ss: listen. 3. Listen and practice with a partner. - Ss: look at the pictures and name the sports.. * Practice.(10’) - T: Ask them to look at the pictures of section A3 and name the sports which the people are playing in English. - T: introduce the new structure “ In English - Ss: write in the exercise book. in order to express how some one do some * New structure. thing. We use adverbs of manner. Most of - Form these adverbs are formed by adjectives. Adj + ly => Adv T: Ask them to look at the lesson Example - T: Play the tape A3 and ask them to listen Skillful -> Skillfully and look at pair sentences in each picture. Slow -> Slowly - T: Ask them to practice in pairs to make other sentences the same. - Use : - T: Call on some pairs to read their own + Adv of manner : thường đứng sau sentences which they have made. động từ để bổ nghĩa cho động từ đó. - T: Listen and remark if necessary. Ex: He plays soccer very well * Production.(15’) - T: ask ss to do exercise. 1. My brother cycles …….she is a….cyclist ( slow /slowly) 2. Ba’s sister swims…… she is a…… ((quick/ quickly) 3. Mr Hai drives……. She is a……. swimmer ( careful /carefully) - T: call ss to stand to answer - T: correct mistakes.. + Adj : dùng để bổ nghĩa cho danh từ làm chủ ngữ or tân ngữ nó có hai vị trí : 1 đứng tước danh từ để bổ nghĩa cho danh từ đó; 2 đứng sau động từ To be. Ex: a skillful player. The player is skillful - Note : Adj Adv Good Well Fast Fast Late Late Hard Hard.

(242) - T: Ask them to look at the pictures of section A5 and ask them some suggested questions : (?) What sports is it in the picture ? (?) Do you like swimming ? Why ? (?) Where can you go swimming ? - T: Introduce: Swimming is a popular sport. Especially for children in the summer however swimming will be dangerous if you don’t strictly follow water safely advice in the pool or on the beach. - T: Guide: You are going to read a passage about the safely awareness in the swimming pool or on the beach. - T: Explain some new words in the lesson. - T Let them listen and repeat the words three times. - T: Repeat the use of the adverbs of manner. - T: Ask them to read the passage again and change the adjectives in the brackets into adverbs. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some pairs to read aloud their completed passage. Others listen and remark.. Early Early 5. Write.(15’) - Ss: look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions.. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: listen to the teacher. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise. * New words. - awareness (n) sự chú ý - aim (n) mục đích - pool life guard (n)bảo vệ bể bơi - pool edge (n) thành bể - obey (v) tuân theo - aware of (adj) nhận thức, ý thức - flag (n) cờ - Ss: listen and repeat the new words three times. - Ss: listen and remember. - Ss: read the passage again and do exercise. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read aloud their completed passage.. - T: Correct and give the right answers.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the form and use of the adverbs of. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. Clear -> clearly Careful -> carefully Safe -> safely Careless -> carelessly.

(243) manner. The use of adjectives. + Name of the sports. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and new structure in the lesson. - Do exercise 1,2 in the workbook on page 82. - Prepare the next period “ A4,5,6” before going to school.. Strict -> strictly. - Ss: practice in front of the class. - Ss: work in front of the class. - Ss: do exercise. - Ss: answer the questions. - Ss: listen and write. - Listen and remember .- Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing : 11/03/2014 PERIOD 81. Date of teaching: 13/03/2014. Class: 7A,7C,7B UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES. LESSON 3: A/ SPORTS (A4,). 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know and understand the advantage of walking and know more about the use of the adverbs of manner. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson.(5’) - T: Call students go to the board to correct exercise 2 in the workbook on. - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise..

(244) page 82. - T: Call on some others to listen and remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(2’) - T: Ask the students to look at the picture on page 132. - T: Ask them some suggested questions: (?) What are they doing ? (?) Do you always walk ? (?) What are the benefits of walking ? (?) Base on the title “ Walking fun” Can you guess what the reading is about ? - T: Introduce: You are going to read a passage about walking one of the most popular sports activities. You read and answer the questions in your exercise book. b. New lesson. * Pre - reading.(10’) - T: Let them listen to the tape once and explain some new words in the lesson. - Ss: look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions Ss: listen to the teacher.. 4. Read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. - take part in (v) tham ra vào - district (n) huyện - competition (n) cuộc thi - participant (n) thí sinh - organize (v) tổ chức - volunteer (n) tình nguyện viên - increase (v) tăng lên - Ss: listen and repeat the new words three times. - Ss: read the words again in front of the class.. - T: Have them listen and repeat the new words three times. - T: Call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. - Ss: read the passage again and answer the questions. * While - reading.(15’) - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - T: Ask them to read the passage again - Ss: answer the questions in front of the and answer the questions. class. - T: Have them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to answer the - Ss: listen, correct and write in the questions in front of the class. Others exercise book. listen and remark and correct if.

(245) necessary. - T: Remark and give the correct answers.. * Correct answers. a. He takes part in Walking For Fun club/ walking. b. The writer’s school team won the first prize; they were so happy and wanted to keep the activity. c. One activity is a 5 km walk/ walking 5 km to the beach on Sunday morning; and other is walk – to – school day. d. It’s 5 km from school to the beach. e. Wednesday is the WTS day. f. Members living near school often take part in the WTS day.. * Post - reading.(8’). c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat: + the benefits of walking. + Position of adverbs. d.Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words in the lesson. - Do exercises 3,4 in the workbook on page 83. - Prepare the new lesson “B1,2” before going to school.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing : 12/03/2014. Date of teaching: 14/03/2014, Class: 7A,7B,7C.

(246) PERIOD 82 UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES. LESSON 4: B/ COME AND PLAY (B1,2) 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to further practice and review the use of the model verbs. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson.(4’) - T: Call some students to go to the board to say about the benefits of walking. - T: Listen and get points.. - Go to the board to say.. * Warm - up.(1’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. New lesson. * Presentation.(10’) - T: Ask the students to look at the pictures of section B1 and ask them : (?) What are Ba and Nam doing ? (?) Can you play table tennis ? - T: Let them listen to the tape B1 once to know the main idea. - T: Introduce and explain the new structures in the dialogue. - T: Ask them to make sentences with the model verbs.. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions. => They are playing table tennis. => Yes, I can. - Ss: listen to the tape once. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New structure. 1.1 Model verbs. Ought to = Should : nên.

(247) Must = Have to : phải Can/ Could/ May / Might - FORM : S + model verbs + V-inf - T: Play the tape B1 the second time and review the polite invitation and the refuse the invitation.. 1.2 Invitation Would you like to + V-inf ? I’d like, but I can’t. * Practice.(10’) - T: Let them listen to the tape the third time and ask them to listen to the tape and answer the questions with the content of the lesson. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to answer the questions in front of the class. Others listen and remark. - T: Remark and give the correct answers.. + Paddles (n) vợt - Ss: listen to the tape and answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answer with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. a. Nam must finish his homework before he plays table tennis. b. Nam will be ready in a few minutes. c. Ba will finish a question for Math. d. Ba has two paddles. * Production.(15’) - T: Ask them to look at the section B2. - T: Guide : You have learnt about the model verbs, how to make or refuse an invitation. Now we continue to practice these verbs. - T: Let them listen to the tape twice. - T: Come on explaining the request of the section B2. Now you are change the underlined details using the information in the box to make up similar dialogues.. 2. Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: look at the section B2. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: listen to the tape twice and practice in pairs..

(248) - T: Call on some pairs to practice their own dialogues using the model verbs as the model dialogue. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary.. - Ss: practice in front of the class. * Example : S1: Come and play volleyball. S2: I’m sorry. I don’t think I can S1: That’s too bad. Why not ? S2: Well, I should visit my grand mother. S1: Can you play on the weekend ? S2: Yes, I can S1: All right. See you on Saturday afternoon. S2: Ok, bye. S1: Bye.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat : + The model verbs. + The structure which inviting and refusing the invitation. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and structures ; the use of the model verbs. - Do exercise 1,2,3 in the workbook on page 83 and 84. - Prepare the new lesson “ B3,4,5” before going to school.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Ss: Listen and write in the workbook.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing : 17/03/2014. Date of teaching: 19/03/2014, Class: 7A,7C,7B.

(249) PERIOD 83. UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES. LESSON 5: B/ COME AND PLAY (B3). 1. Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to understand the passage about the new and strange sport. Know more about the modal verbs. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson.(4’) - T: Call some student go to the board to - Ss: Go to the board to correct exercise correct exercise 3 in the workbook on 3. page 85. - T: Call on some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm - up.(1’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen.. b. New lesson. * Presentation.(15’) 3. Read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: look at the pictures.. - T: Ask students to look at the pictures of the section B3. - T: Ask them some suggested questions - Ss: answer the questions. This is the sports which we have never learnt before. You look at the picture and tell me which sport it’s. - T: Introduce : This is a scuba – diving. - T: come on asking : - Ss: listen..

(250) (?) Where can we play this sport ? (?) What equipment do we need do ? - T: Introduce some new words in the lesson.. - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions. - Ss: write the new words in the exercise book. * New words. - surface (n) bề mặt - peal diver (n) thợ lặn ngọc trai - equipment (n) thiết bị - invent (v) phát minh - inventor (n) nhà phát minh - invention (n) sự phát minh - deep- sea diving vessel (n) tàu lặn sâu dưới đáy biển - T: Let them listen and repeat the words - scuba – diving (n) môn lặn có bình three times. dưỡng khí. - Ss: listen and repeat the words three * Practice.(15’) times. - T: Let them read the text carefully again and answer the questions. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read their own answers. Others listen and remark. - T: Correct and give the right answers.. - Ss: read the text again and answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read the answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write the right answers in the exercise book. * Correct answers. 1. F . Most of the world’s surface is water. 2. T. 3. F. Now Scuba – diving is a popular sport because people can swim freely in the water with the help of special breathing equipment. 4. F. Jacques Cousteau invented special TV cameras. 5. T .. c. Consolidation.(5’) - Repeat the content of the lesson: + The scuba – diving.. - Ss: Listen and remember..

(251) + The modal verbs. d. Homework(5’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and the modal verbs. - Do exercises 4,5 on page 85 and 86 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ Unit 14 A1” before going to school.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing : 17/03/2014. PERIOD 84. Date of teaching: 20/03/2014, Class:7A,7C,7B. UNIT 14: FREE TIME FUN LESSON 1: A/ TIME FOR TV (A1). 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to express what activities they do in their free time. Invite or suggest and reply an invitation/ a suggestion. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities.

(252) a. Check the old lesson.(5’) - T: Call some students go to the board to - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise. correct exercise 4 in the workbook on page 85. - T: Call on some others remark and correct if necessary. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(2’) - Ss: Answer the teacher’s questions - T: Ask students some suggested questions to introduce the topic of the lesson. (?) Do you usually watch TV ? (?) When do you watch TV ? (?) Do you watch TV at home and some where ? (?) What is your favorite program ? - Ss: listen. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. New lesson.. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.. * Presentation.(10’) - Ss: look at the pictures. - T: Come on asking them to look at the picture of the section A1 on page 139. - T: Introduce : This is the picture of Hoa’s family. Look at it and guess what they do in their free time. Do they watch TV ? - T: Introduce watching TV is one of the most popular activities in free time. You are going to listen to a conversation between Lan and Hoa. What do Lan’s and Hoa’s family do in their free time ? - T: Let them listen to the tape once and ask them : (?) Do you recognize the structure you have learnt ? - T: Repeat the structure “ invitation” and ask them to give some examples. - T: Introduce some new structure and give an example.. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: listen.. - Ss: listen to the tape once.. - Ss: listen and remember. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book..

(253) * New structure.. - T: Introduce some programs on TV.. * Practice.(15’). S + prefer(s) to do some things * Example. She prefers to read books to newspapers. - Ss: listen and write. * New words. - News in English: Bản tin tiếng Anh. - News: thời sự - Series: phim nhiều tập - The adventure of Cricket : dế mèn phưu lưu kí.. * Now choose the best answer. - T: Let them listen to the tape twice and - Ss: listen to the tape twice and ask them to practice it in pairs. practice in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work in front - Ss: practice it in pairs in front of the of the class. class. - T: Listen and correct their pronunciation if necessary. - T: Ask them to read the conversation - Ss: read the dialogue again and again carefully. Choose the best answer choose the best answers. in the following sentences base on the content of the lesson. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: compare their answers with - T: Call on some students to read their partner. own answers in front of the class. Others - Ss: read their answers in front of the listen and remark. class. - T: Correct and give the correct answers. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Production.(8’) * Answers. - T: ask ss to answer the questions a–C b–A c–B d–C e –D 1. What does Lan invite Hoa do? 2. What time can Hoa come to Lan’s house? - Ss: answer the questions. 3. What do Lan’s family do in the every night? - T: call ss to stand to answer - T: correct mistakes. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the structure which give and - Ss: answer. reply an invitation..

(254) + Prefer to do some things. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new - Ss: Listen and remember. words and new structures. - Do exercise 1 on page 87,88 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “A2” before - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise going to school. book. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================. Date of preparing : 18/03/2014. Date of teaching: 21/03/2014, Class: 7A,7C,7B. PERIOD 85 UNIT 14: FREE TIME FUN LESSON 2: A/ TIME FOR TV (A2) 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to give a suggestion or invitation and practice in pairs to say about the activities which they like or dislike in their free time. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson.(5’) T: Call some students go to the board to.

(255) rewrite the new structure in the last period - T: Go to the board to do as the teacher and give two examples. requests. - T: Call on some others look at the board and remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up(2’) - T: Ask students some suggested questions: (?) Do you usually watch TV ? (?) What program do you like ? (?) Is film your favorite program ? (?) Do you usually go to the movie theater ? - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. - T: answer the teacher’s questions. - Ss: listen. b. New lesson. * Presentation.(10’) 2. Listen and read. Then practice with - T: Ask them to look at the advertisement a partner. about the programs. - T: Explain the content of the - Ss: look at the advertisements. advertisements. - T: Ask them to practice in pairs : asking - Ss: listen to the teacher. and answering about the programs which they like or dislike. - Ss: work in pairs: asking and - T: Call on some pairs to work in front of answering about the programs which the class. Others listen and remark. they like or dislike. - T: Give some new words. - Ss: work in front of the class.. * Practice.(13’) - T: Introduce: You are going to listen a conversation between Hoa and Lan. They are discussing the suitable program to see.. - Ss: listen and write. * New words. - HN Youth Culture House - Pop concert - HN Opera House - Classical concert - Fansland theater - Detective movie - nightly - New age theater - Cowboy movie - Youth theater.

(256) You listen and answer which program - Ss: listen to the teacher. will they see ? - T: Let them listen to the tape once and review the structures to invite and suggest or request. - Ss: listen to the tape * Review the structure + The invitation: Would you like to …….. ? + The suggestion : What about ….. ? - T: Let them listen to the tape the second Why don’t …….? time. Let’s …….. - T: Ask them to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ss: listen to the tape. - T: Call on some pairs to work in front of the class. - Ss: Work in pairs. * Further practice.(10’). - Ss: work in front of the class.. - T: Guide: Now you work in pairs to look at the advertisements again and discuss the program you will see by making up a similar dialogue. - Ss: listen and work in pairs. - T: Go around the class and help them if necessary. - T: Call on some pairs to work their own dialogue before the class. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat : + The new words. + The structures. - Ss: work in front of the class. - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and structures. - Do exercises 2,3 in the workbook on - Ss: Listen and write in their exercise page 88 and 89. book. - Prepare the next period “A3,4” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:………………………………………………………………...

(257) =============================================. Date of preparing : 24/03/2014. PERIOD 86. Date of teaching: 26/03/2014, Class: 7A,7C,7B. UNIT 14: FREE TIME FUN LESSON 3: A/ TIME FOR TV (A3,4*). 1.Aim. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know the development of TV in Viet Nam and understand more about the cultural life of the Vietnamese. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3.Stages of the lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities a. Check the old lesson.(5’) - T: Call some students go to the board to correct exercise 3 in the work book on page 89. - T: Call on some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points.. - Ss: Go to the board to correct exercise.. * Warm - up.(2’) - Ss: listen. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b.New lesson. * Pre – reading.(10’) - T: Ask the students to look at the pictures in section A3. - T: Ask them: (?) Look at the pictures and title TV in. 3. Read. TV in Viet Nam - Ss: look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions..

(258) Viet Nam. Can you guess what the reading is about ? - T: Introduce : We are going to read a passage entitle “ TV in Viet Nam”. You scan it and see whether you guess is similar to the reading or not. - T: Let them read the passage once. Then the teacher introduce and explain the new words.. - T: listen and repeat the new words three times. - T: call on some students to go to the board to read the words again.. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: read and write the words in the exercise book. * New words. - gather (v) tập trung, tụ tập - inside (adv) bên trong - outside (adv) bên ngoài - through (adv) qua - sleep (v) ngủ - change (v) chuyển đổi, đổi - Ss: listen and repeat. - Ss: read the words in front of the class.. * While – reading.(15’) - Ss: answer the questions. - T: Ask them to read the passage and answer the questions with the content of the lesson. 1. Did many people in VN have TV set in their home thirty years ago ? What did they always do after dinner? 2. What color were the TV programs thirty years ago ? 3. Where do people watch TV today?. -> No, only a few people had TV sets thirty years ago. They always gathered both outside and inside their neighbors’ home after dinner. -> They are black and white. -> Today people watch TV in their won living room. -> No, they don’t spend much time together.. 4.Did they spend much time together? - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class.. - T: Call on some students to answer the questions. Others listen, remark and compare their answers if necessary. - Ss: listen and write if necessary. - T: Give the suggested answers. * Now complete the summary. - T: Come on asking them to look at the - Ss: complete the summary. section “ Now you complete the summary” the summary is written in other way. Now you use the information in the original passage and complete the.

(259) summary. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers before the class. Others listen and remark. - T: Remark and give the right answers.. * Post – reading.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read the answers in front of the class. - Ss: write the correct answers in the exercise book. * Answer keys. 1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular 5. evening 6. gather 7. They 8. today 9. have 10. life 11. know. - T: Give an exercise and ask them to check these sentences T or F with the content of the lesson. 1. Most people in VN had a TV set thirty years ago. 2. TV owner were not popular at that time. 3. People always gathered in the TV owner’s house. *Post- reading(8’) - T: Call on some students to go to the board to correct. - T: Listen and remark.. - Ss: Do exercise.. - T: Let them listen to play with words.. 4. Play with words.. -> F -> F -> T. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. - Listen and remember. d. Homework.(2’) - Ask them to read the passage again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 4 on page 89 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B1,2” before going to school.. - Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:………………………………………………………………...

(260) =============================================. Date of preparing : 25/03/2014. Date of teaching: 27/03/2014, Class: 7A,7C,7B. PERIOD 87 UNIT 14: FREE TIME FUN LESSON 4: B/ WHAT’S ON? (B1,2) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to discuss about TV programs and their favorite programs and know more the name of the programs through listening. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(7’). Students’ activities. - T: Call some students go to the board to - Go to the board to do exercise. correct exercise 4 in the workbook on page 89. - T: Call on some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm - up.(1’) - T: Ask students to look at the picture and ask them some suggested questions : (?) What program is on TV set ?. - Ss: looka t the pictures and answer the questions..

(261) (?) Who are the characters ? (?) Which cartoon is the character from ? (?) Do you like watching cartoon on TV ? (?) Which character do you like best ? - T: Introduce: We are going to listen to a conversation between Ba and Nga. You listen and answer What they are talking about ? Do you like cartoons ?. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. b. Teaching the new lesson.(10’) * Presentation. - T: Let them listen to the dialogue twice. - T: Introduce and explain some new words and structures.. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: listen to the dialogue twice. - Ss: listen and writ in the exercise book.. - T: Ask them to give some examples. * Practice.(10’) - T: Ask them to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work it in front of the class. - T: Listen and correct their pronunciation if necessary. - T: Ask them to look at the section “ Now answer” . Read the questions quickly. - T: Have them read the dialogue again carefully and answer the questions. - T: Let them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to answer the questions before the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary - T: Remark, correct and give the right answers.. * New structures S + like to do some things doing some things S + prefer to do some things doing some things - Ss: give some examples.. - Ss: work the dialogue in pairs. - Ss: practice it in front of the class.. - Ss: read the questions quickly.. - Ss: read the dialogue again carefully and answer the questions. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner..

(262) - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class.. * Production.(12’) - T: Come on explaining the request of the section B2. - T: Ask them: (?) Do you know the names of these popular programs on TV ?. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. a. No, because there aren’t any good programs for teenagers. b. Ba watches sports shows, cartoons and movies. c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries. d. Nga doesn’t like the music program because they don’t play the kind of music she likes. e. this evening Nga is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book. 2. Listen. Write the times of the programs. - Ss: listen to the teacher. - Ss: answer the question.. - T: Explain the name of the programs. - Ss: listen and write. * New words. - children’s program : CT dành cho trẻ em - early news: bản tin buổi sáng - weather forecast: dự báo thời tiết - T: Introduce : You are going to listen to a - The World Today: thế giới ngày nay. dialogue between Lan and Ba who are - A Fistful of Dollars: đồng tiền vấy talking about the times of TV programs. máu. - T: Ask them to listen and write down the - Ss: listen. time of the above programs. - T: Let them listen to the tape twice or three times. - T: Have them compare their answers - Ss: listen and write. with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read their - Ss: listen to the tape three times. answers in front of the class. Others listen and remark. - Ss: compare their answers with a - T: Let them listen to the tape at last time partner..

(263) and give the correct answers. Tape transcript Ba: What is on TV at six tonight ,Lan ? Lan: Let me see. It’s the early news, you want to watch it, don’t you ? Ba: Come on, Lan ! I want to watch the movie “A Fistful Dollars” when does it start ? Lan: It starts at seven o’clock, after the program The World Today at a quarter past six. Ba: And what about the weather forecast ? What time is it on ? Lan: it’s on at ten past six. But we should watch our children’s program. It starts at five. Ba: Ok. That sounds great. c. Consolidation. - Repeat the content of the lesson: + like to do some things doing some things + prefer to do some things. doing some things. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen and write. * Answer keys. a. Children’s programs : 5 o’clock. b. Early News : at six o’clock. c. Weather forecast: at ten past six. d. The World Today: at a quarter past six. e. Movie: at seven o’clock.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework. - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and structures. - Do exercises 1,2 in the workbook on page 90and 91. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise - Prepare the new lesson before going to book. school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================.

(264) Date of preparing: 25/3/2014. PERIOD 88. Date of teaching: 28/03/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. UNIT 14: FREE TIME FUN LESSON 5: B/ WHAT’S ON? (B3,4). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about the popular TV programs. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(7’) - T: Call some students go to the board to correct exercise 1 in the workbook on page 90. - T: Call on some others to remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(1’) - T: Let the students play “ Networks” about the name of some programs on TV. - T: Ask them to work in groups to find out the program on TV. (?) Which group has more programs is. Students’ activities - Go to the board to correct exercise. Example. a. Minh likes listening to music. b. Most old people likes watching TV. ………....................................... - Ss: Play TV programs. Early News. Cartoon. Sport show.

(265) winner ? + Children’s programs + News + Film - Ss: listen. - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson.(10’) * Pre – reading.. 3. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - T: Ask them to look at the picture of the - Ss: look at the pictures. section B3 on page 145. - T: Ask them: - Ss: answer the questions (?) Do you recognize the characters in => The Moffatts ban: 4 contestants of “ each picture ? The road to the Olympia peak” TV (?) In which programs do these scenes contest the famous Detective Sherlock usually appear ? Holmes - T: Explain some meanings of the programs and some new words in the lesson.. - T: Let them listen and repeat the new words three times. - T: Call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation. - T: Introduce : You are going to listen to the tape of the section B3 about the three popular TV programs. You listen to the tape and look at the book. Then tell me again “What are the programs?”. - Ss: listen and write. * New words. + audience (n) khán giả + perform (v) biểu diễn + contest (n) cuộc thi + contestant (n) thí sinh + folk music(n) nhạc cổ điển + import (v) nhập khẩu - Ss: listen and repeat the words three times. - Ss: read the words again in front of the class. - Ss: listen to the tape.. * While – reading.(12’) - T: Let them listen to the tape three times. - T: Ask them to read the text again and answer the questions bellow the passage. - T: Have them compare their answers. - Ss: listen to the tape three times. - Ss: read the passage again and answer.

(266) with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers and others listen and correct if necessary. - T: Remark and give the correct answers.. the questions. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists. b. In contest programs, the contestants are students, workers or family members. c. Import usually include police and hospital series.. * Post – reading.(10’) - T: Ask them to look at the section B4 and explain the request of the exercise. - T: Have them read the words given in the box. - T: Ask them to read the passage and use the words given to complete the passage. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read their completed passage aloud and others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Give the correct answers and have them copy the passage in their exercise book.. d. Students’ answer I want to see science programs and comic cartoons. 4. Write. Complete the passage use the words in the box. - Ss: look at the section B4 and listen. - Ss: read the words. - Ss: read the passage and complete it using the words in the box. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their completed passage in front of the class. - Ss: correct and write in the exercise book..

(267) c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson.. * Correct answers. 1. around 6. like 2. watch 7. station 3. listen 8. receive 4. series 9. cities 5. show 10. possible. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and read the passage again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 3,4 and 5 in the workbook - Ss: Listen and remember. on page 91 and 92. - Prepare the next period TEST 45’. - Ss: Listen and write in their exercise book. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================.

(268) Date of teaching: 02/04/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. Date of preparing: 21/3/2014 PERIOD : 89. TEST 45’. 11/ Objectives.. a/ The knowledge - Check understanding of ss about using vocabulary, structure, grammar and apply in reality. b/ Skills - Help ps to check their knowledge and have right attitude to the subject, especially about 3 skills such aslistening, reading and writing -Help ps to practise doing exercises skill c/Education -Help the ps love learning English and be self- confident when using English A.Matrix CHỦ ĐỀ. LANGUAGE CONTENT Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ %. NHẬN BIẾT. 6 3 30 Read the passage, then write T or F in the boxes 4 2 20. Tỉ lệ % Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets:. Số câu Số điểm. 4 3. Tỉ lệ %. 30. Tỉ lệ %. CỘNG. 6 3 30. Số câu Số điểm. Tổng số câu Tổng số điểm. VẬN DỤNG. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D.. READING. WRITING. THÔNG HIỂU. 4 2 20. Reorder the words in the sentences into correct sentences 2 2 20. 10 câu = 6điểm = 60 %. 6 5 50 6câu = 4điểm = 40 %. 16câu = 10 điểm = 100%.

(269) B.QUESTIONS I/ Choose the best answer A, B, C or D. ( 3,0ps) 1. She looked tired. What’s the ..............with her? A. matter B. happen C. wrong 2. Phuong likes cady. Huong likes candy,…………………. A. either B. too C. neither 3. She doesn’t like coffee, and..............does her brother. A. either B. neither C. so 4. I don’t like durian. A. so do I B. so do too C. neither do I 5. I ………..a new book last week. A. buy B. bought C. to buy 6. She plays tennis………………... A. bad B. bad C.badly 8. II/ Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets: ( 3point ) 1. Yesterday Hoa…………………………………… ( go ) to the market. 2. I would like …………………………( tell ) you about my family. 3.I ……………..( go) out last night with my friends 4. ……………(Do).you play basketball yesterday ? III/ Read this passage carefully then answer the following questions ( 2 point ) Hoa had a wonderful holiday last summer. She was in Ha Noi, the capital of Viet Nam. She stayed at her aunt’s house for two weeks. She visited a lot of interesting places such as uncle’s mausoleum, Ba Dinh square, west lake, Le Nin park. She bought many things for his friends and a cap with a national flag on it. Hoa liked the cap very much. She wore it all day. When she returned to Hue, she told his friends about this vacation. 1 .Decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F) a) Hoa had a wonderful holiday in Ha Long. ………… b) She stayed at her aunt’s house for two weeks ……….... c) She bought many things for his sisters ……….... d) She loves the cap with a national flag on it. VI/ Reorder the words in the sentences into correct sentences ( 2 point ) 1. Mai / late / was / for school / yesterday morning. ……………………………………………………………………………. 2. He / the cinema / went to / last night. …………………………………………………………………………… * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. =============================================.

(270) C. ANSWER KEYS. I: ( 2đ ) Mỗi câu đúng được (0,5 đ) 1.A 4.D. 2.B 5.C. 3.B 6.C. II: ( 1đ) Mỗi câu đúng được (0,75 đ) 1. Went. 3. went. 2. to tell. 4. did. III: ( 2® ) (1đ) Mỗi câu đúng được (0,5 đ) a.F b. T c. F. d.T. IV: (1đ) Mỗi câu đúng được (1 đ) 1. Mai was late for school yesterday morning. 2. He went to the cinema last night.. Date of preparing: 01/4/2014. PERIOD : 90. Date of teaching: 03/4/2014 - Class 7A,,B,C. CORRECT THE TEST. 1. OBJECTIVE. - Correct the “TEST” for the students how to know their result of the test 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, chalk… b. Students : Books, pens ; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE . a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional ) b. Teaching the new lesson. 2đ ) Mỗi câu đúng được (0,5 đ) 1.A. 2.B. 3.B.

(271) 4.D. 5.C. 6.C. II: ( 1đ) Mỗi câu đúng được (0,75 đ) 2. Went. 3. went. 2. to tell. 4. did. III: ( 2® ) (1đ) Mỗi câu đúng được (0,5 đ) a.F b. T c. F. d.T. IV: (1đ) Mỗi câu đúng được (1 đ) 3. Mai was late for school yesterday morning. 4. He went to the cinema last night. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================. Date of preparing: 02/4/2014. Date of teaching: 04/4/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. PERIOD 91 UNIT 15: GOING OUT LESSON 1: A/ VIDEO GAMES (A1) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know how to give an advise and reply the advise; more about the video games. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE..

(272) Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson. (Optional). Students’ activities. * Warm – up.(7’) - T: Ask students to look at the pictures - Ss: Look at the picture and answer the in the section A1 and ask them: teacher’s questions. (?) What do you see in the picture ? (?) Are there any amusement centers in your neighborhood/ town ? (?) Do you usually go to the an amusement center ? (?) What do you usually do there ? (?) what will happen if you play too much games ? - T: Introduce: You are going to listen to the conversation between Lan and - Ss: listen. Nam. Nam is going to the amusement center. You listen to it and tell me What Nam will do there. b. Teaching the new lesson.(10’) * Presentation. - T: Let them listen to the conversation once. - T: Introduce and explain some new words and some new structure.. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: listen to the conversation once - Ss: listen and write. * New words. - amusement center(n) trung tâm vui chơi giả trí - addictive (adj) gây nghiện - arcade (n) khu vui chơi, mua bán có vòm * Structure ( Advise ) Don’t + V ! Ex:. - T: Have them listen and repeat the words and structures three times.. Don’t worry ! - Ss: listen and repeat the words and structure three times.. * Practice.(15’) - Ss: practice the conversation in pairs..

(273) - T: Ask them to practice the conversation in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class to check their pronunciation.. - Ss: work in front of the class.. - T: Guide: Now look at the section “ Now answer” and answer the questions. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to answer the questions in front of the class. Others listen and remark/ correct if necessary - T: Give the correct answers.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class.. * Now answer. - Ss: listen and answer the questions.. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. a. He is going to the amusement center. b. He’s going to play video games. c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week. d. No, he doesn’t. He doesn’t spend much money. e. He usually stays for about an hour. f. Nam must be careful because video games can be addictive. g. He’ ll do his homework late.. - Ss: play “Networks” * Further Practice.(8’). Do harm to eyes Waste money. - T: Organize them play Networks To some extent, video games help you Video games’ relax after hard working day. However, effects spending too much time on video games can be harmful. Now you work in Backache Learn worse groups listening the bad effects caused by video games. Waste time - T: Ask them to repeat their opinions. - T: Go around the class to help them if necessary. - T: Call on some students to report their own ideas. - Ss: Listen and remember. - T: Listen, remark and can give them points..

(274) c. Consolidation.(3’) - Ss: Listen and write in their exercise book. - Repeat the content of the conversation and the structures to give the advise and reply it. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and structures. - Ask them to write 5 sentences to advise “Should or Shouldn’t” do in the free time. - Do exercise 1,2 in the workbook on page 94. - Prepare the next period “A2,3” before going to school.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ===========================================. Date of preparing: 7/4/2014. Date of teaching: 10/4/2014 - Class 7A,B.C.

(275) PERIOD 92 UNIT 15: GOING OUT LESSON 2: A/ VIDEO GAMES (A2,3) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about the games and affects of video games and solution of playing video games. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) (?) Call some pairs go to the board to practice the dialogue in the section A1 and answer the questions. - T: Call on some others listen and remark. - T: Remark and get points.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do as the teacher requests.. * Warm – up.(2’) - T: Ask students some suggested questions: (?) Do you often play video games ? (?) How long do you spend ? (?) How do you feel when you spend too much time to play video games ? - T: introduce the content of the lesson. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Pre – reading.(10’) - T: Introduce: In the last period, we learn. 2. Listen and read.. video.

(276) about video games and discuss its bad effects on us if we play too much. (?) Do you remember what we discussed ? - Ss: listen and answer the question Today we continue with this topic in the reading. Doctor will give you some advises that prevent video games from becoming addictive. In your opinion what are the advises ? - T: Let them listen to the tape once and ask them: What is the main idea of the reading ? - T: Introduce and explain some new words. - Ss: listen to the tape once. - T: Let them listen and repeat the words twice. Then call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. * While – reading.(15’) - T: Let them listen to the tape the second time. Ask them to listen and notice on the main idea of the lesson. - T: Guide now you look at the section “ Now answer” and choose the best answers to complete the sentences base on the content of the reading. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class. Others listen and remark if necessary. - T: Remark, correct and give the right answers. - T: Call on some students to read the passage aloud to check their pronunciation.. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + dizzy (adj) chóng mặt, hoa mắt + outdoor (adj) ngoài trời + social skill (n) kĩ năng giao tiếp xã hội. - Ss: listen and repeat the words twice. * Now answer. Complete the sentences. - Ss: listen and then read the passage again carefully and answer the questions.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their answers in front of the class.. * Post – reading.(8’) - T: Come on asking them to read the. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book..

(277) uncompleted passage in the section A3 quickly. (?) Ask them: What are the three useful of video ?. * Answer keys. a. – D play b. – A become c. – D all d. – B little time. - T: Explain the request of the section A3 “ Complete the passage with the words in the box. - T: Let them compare their answers with their partners. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their completed passage before the class. Others listen and remark. - T: Correct and give the correct answers.. 3. Complete the passage with the words in the box. - Ss: read the uncompleted passage and answer the teacher’s question. => In banks, stores, education and the music industry. - Ss: listen and do exercise. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read their completed passage in front of the class.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the reading + Bad effects of video games and the doctor’s advice. + Useful of video in the life. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to rewrite the bad effects of video games and the doctor’s advise and applications of video in the life. - Do exercise 3 on page 95 in the workbook. - Prepare the new lesson “ B1” before going to school.. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. 1. be 6. use 2. have 7. can 3. is 8. will 4. identify 9. buy 5. are 10. how. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING:.

(278) + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================. Date of preparing: 19/4/2014. Date of teaching: 11/4/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. PERIOD 93 UNIT 15: GOING OUT LESSON 3: B/ IN THE CITY (B1) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about the life in the city. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) - T: Call students go to the board to talk. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do as the teacher.

(279) about the applications of video and answer requests. the teacher’s questions. - T: Call on some others listen and remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(2’) - T: Ask students to look at the picture of the section B1 and ask them some questions: (?) Do you live in the city or in the countryside ? (?) What do you think about the life in the city and in the countryside ? - Ss: introduce the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Look at the picture and answer the teacher’s questions. -> In the city: busy, noise…… -> In the countryside: quiet, peaceful…… - Ss: listen.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.(10’) - T: Introduce: You are going to listen to a conversation between Lan and Hoa. You listen to it and tell me what you think about living in the city and in the countryside. - T: Play the tape the first time and ask them to listen and answer the teacher’s questions. - T: Introduce and explain some new words and new structure in the dialogue.. - T: Ask them to give some examples using the new structure.. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: listen to the teacher’s introduction.. - Ss: listen to the tape and answer the teacher’s questions. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + the rest of the week: những ngày còn lại trong tuần. + a little traffic: ít xe cộ + busy roads: những con đường đông đúc. * New structure. - Keep somebody + adj : làm cho ai đó ntn. Ex: Keep me awake..

(280) * Practice.(15’) - T: Play the tape the second time and ask them to listen and answer the questions in the section “Now answer” - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class. Others listen and remark if necessary. - T: Remark and give the correct answers.. * Production.(8’) - T: Come on asking them to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work it before the class to check their pronunciation.. - Get used to do some thing: Be Quen, thích nghi với cái gì. * Now answer. - Ss: answer the questions.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. a. She goes to the school theater club once a week. The rest of the week she usually stays home in the evening. b. No, she doesn’t like the city. c. Before she lived in a village near Hue. d. She liked living there because she knew all the people in her neighborhood. The village was quiet and there was only a little traffic. e. Because, she hates the noise and the busy roads. f. She hates crossing the road most because there are bikes, motorbikes and cars coming from every direction. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ss: work it in front of the class.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat: + The content of the lesson. + The new words and structure. - Ss: Listen and remember. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new.

(281) words and new structure. - Do exercise 1 on page 96 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B2,3” before going to school.. - Ss: Listen and write in exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================. Date of preparing: 14/4/2014. Date of teaching: 16/4/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. PERIOD 94 UNIT 15: GOING OUT LESSON 4: B/ IN THE CITY (B2,3) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about the life in the city clearly. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’). Students’ activities.

(282) - T: Call some students go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions: (?) Do you like the city/ the country ? Why ? Why not ? - T: Listen and get points.. - Ss: Go to the board to answer the teacher’s questions.. * Warm – up.(2’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson. - Ss: listen. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Pre - reading.(15’) - T: Ask the students to look at the section B2. - T: Guide: Now you practice: asking and answering the questions. Especially concentrate in b,c to list the advantages and disadvantages in the city and in the countryside. - T: Call some students from the groups to tell their ideas.. 2. Work with a partner. - Ss: look at the section B2. - Ss: listen and practice.. - Ss: tell their ideas. * Living in the country Advantages + quiet + peaceful + a little traffic + fresh air. Disadvantages + a few entertainment + boring + inconvenient. * Living in the city.. - T: Ask them to look at the tables and practice. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class.. Advantages + comfortable + a lot of entertainment + good education (good school; teacher; facilities…. ). Disadvantages + crowded + noisy + heavy traffic. …………….. - Ss: look at the tables and practice. - Ss: practice in front of the class..

(283) 3. Read. - T: Introduce: In the last period Lan said that Hoa would get used to the life in the city soon. In your opinion was she right ? And what could Hoa do in the city ? - T: Ask them to read the passage quickly and answer the questions. At the same time introduce and explain some new words and new group words.. - T: Have them listen and repeat the words twice following the teacher.. * While – reading.(10’) - T: Guide: Now you read the text again carefully and make a list of the things Hoa usually does in the evening using the present simple tense. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Go around the class to help them if necessary. - T: Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class. - T: Listen and give the correct answers.. * Post – reading.(8’). - Ss: listen.. - Ss: read the passage and write the new words in the exercise book. * New words. + help each other: giúp đỡ nhau + together (adv) cùng nhau + far too expensive: quá đắt + eat out: ăn tiệm + socialize (v) giao tiếp + after all sau tất cả - Ss: listen and repeat the new words. * Review Prefer/ like to do some thing. doing some thing * Make a list of thing Hoa does: Ss: read the text and make a list of the things Hoa usually does in the evening. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. + she visits some friends. + she talks and listens to music. + she and her friends help each other with their housework. + she plays table tennis. + she plays chess. + she socializes with her friends. + she goes to the public library and borrows books..

(284) - T: Ask them some questions about the content of the lesson to check their understanding. (?) What did Hoa and her friends often do together ? (?) Why did Ha rarely go to see movies nor eat out in the evening ? (?) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her village ? (?) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ? - T: Have them read the passage again and answer the teacher’s questions. - T: Call on some students to answer the questions before the class and others listen and remark. - T: Correct if necessary.. - Ss: answer the questions about the content of the lesson.. - Ss: read the passage answer the questions. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write if necessary. * Answers. a. They talked and listened to music or helped each other with their homework: or played table tennis. b. Because, they were for too expensive. c. Because, there wasn’t a library there. d. Because, she got used to it.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words and read the passage again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 2,3 in the work book on page 96 and 97. - Prepare the next period “B4,5” before going to school.. - Listen and remember.. - Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:………………………………………………………………...

(285) ============================================. Date of preparing: 15/4/2014. Date of teaching: 17/4/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. PERIOD 95 UNIT 15: GOING OUT LESSON 5: B/ IN THE CITY (B4,5*) 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to listen and match the each name to an activity. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the new lesson. (5’). Students’ activities. - T: Call students go to the board to retell - Ss: Go to the board to retell as the teacher about Hoa with the things which she did requests. in the city. - T: Call on some others listen and remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm – up.(2’) - Let them play “ Network” about the places which are in the city and in the. - Ss: play “Networks”.

(286) countryside. - Tell them which team has more correct words, is winner. - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. Houses Rivers. Fields Country Pagodas. Temples. Buildings Hotels. Zoos City. Libraries. b. Teaching the new lesson.. Parks. 4. Listen. match each name to an activity. - Ss: look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s question.. * Pre – listening.(10’) - T: Ask them to look at the pictures in the section B4 on page 152 and answer the teacher’s questions. (?) What are the entertainment activities in the pictures ? - T: Introduce the activities in the text. - T: Come on introduce these are 6 activities that Ba, Hoa, Nga, Nam Lan and An did yesterday evening. Now you listen to the tape and match each name to an activity. * While – listening.(15’). - Ss: listen and note. - Ss: listen. a. play chess. b. play table tennis. c. listen to CDs ( Music ) d. watch a soccer match. e. go to the restaurant. - Ss: listen to the tape three times.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - T: Let them listen to the tape three times - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. and ask them to do exercise..

(287) - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Let them listen to the tape at last time and give the correct answers. Tape transcript Yesterday, Ba played table tennis. Nga saw a movie. Lan went to a restaurant. Hoa played chess. Nam listened to CDs. An watched a soccer match.. - Ss: listen to the tape at last time and correct if necessary. * Answers. Ba – b Hoa – a Nga – d Nam – c Lan – f An – e. - Ss: practice in pairs about their activities. * Post – listening.(8’) - Ss: work in front of the class. - T: Ask them to practice in pairs: asking and answering about the activities which the roles in the lesson did last night. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class. - T: Listen and remark if necessary.. - Ss: listen and remark if necessary Example. S1: What did Ba do yesterday evening ? S2: He plays chess. ……………………………. ……………………………. - Ss: Listen and remember.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson.. - Ss: Listen and write in their exercise book.. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to rewrite the activities of the roles in the lesson did yesterday evening. - Do exercise 4 in the workbook on page 98. - Prepare the next period “Unit 16 A1” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………….

(288) + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================. Date of preparing: 16/4/2014. PERIOD 96. Date of teaching: 18/4/20104- Class 7A,B,C. UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES LESSON 1: A/ FAMOUS PLACES IN ASIA (A1,2). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know some famous places in Asia and some famous capitals of some countries. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(5’) - T: Call some students go to the board to correct exercise 4 on page 98 in the workbook. - T: Call on some students to listen and remark. - T: Correct and get points. * Warm – up.(5’) - T: Organize students to play “Networks” about the name of the. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do exercise.. Cambodia Philippines. America Countrie.

(289) countries which they’ve learnt in English. - T: Divide the class into 2 groups which Thailand Malaysia group has more name of countries is winner. Singapore - T: introduce the content of the lesson. - Ss: listen to the teacher. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.( 10’). 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.. - T: Ask them to tell the name of the countries in the South East Asia. - T: Ask them to look at the pictures in the section A1 and explain by asking some suggested questions: (?) Where is Bangkok ? What do you know about Thailand ? (?) Besides, Thailand which counties and their capitals in South East Asia you know ? - T: Introduce some countries and their capital.. - Ss: tell the names of the countries in the South East Asia. - Ss: look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions.. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. + Bangkok. + Hong Kong. + Kuala Lumpur. + Singapore. + Phnom Penh. + Jakarta. + Vientiane. + Yangon. - Ss: listen.. - T: Come on introducing the content of the lesson “ You are going to listen to the conversation between Hoa and Ba. Ba tells Hoa about his uncle Nghia – a pilot and the places Mr.Nghia visited. You listen and tell me which places he flew to” - T: Play the tape the first time and ask them to give the name of places. * Practice.(10’) - T: Guide: Now you listen to the tape and look at the section “ Now match the. - Ss: listen to the tape.. * Now match the half – sentences - listen and do exercise..

(290) half – sentences” to make complete one’s. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class. others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Remark and give the correct answers.. - Ss: compare their answer with a partner. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. a–D b–F c–B d–C e–A f–E - Ss: practice the conversation in pairs. - Ss: work it in front of the class.. - T: Ask them to practice the conversation in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - T: Listen and correct their pronunciation 2. Complete the table use the names of if necessary. the countries in the box. - Ss: look at the table. * Further Practice.(10’) - Ss: do exercise. - T: Come on asking them to look at the box and the table. - T: Explain the request of the section A2 - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. “ Complete the table use the names of the - Ss: go to the board to do it. countries in the box”. - T: Ask them to compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the - T: Call on some students to read aloud exercise book. their answers and others listen and Capital Country remark. Thailand - T: Correct and give the correct answers. Bangkok Beijing China Kuala Lumpur Malaysia Phnom Penh Cambodia Vientiane Laos Yangon Myanmar Jakarta Indonesia - Ss: look at the table and practice in pairs. - T: Ask them to look at the section “ Now ask and answer questions with a partner”.. - Ss: work in front of the class. * Example. S1: Where does Ba’s uncle fly to ?.

(291) - T: Let them practice in pairs. S2: He usually flies to Bangkok. - T: Call on some pairs to work in front of S1: Where is that ? the class. S2: It’s in Thailand. - T: Listen and correct their pronunciation if necessary. - Ss: Listen and remember. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson + Names of some countries and their capitals in the lesson.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. d. Guide the homework.(4’) - Ask them to write 10 -> 15 countries and capitals which they’ve learnt. - Do exercise 1 on page 99 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “ A3,4” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================ Date of preparing: 21/4/2014. PERIOD 97. Date of teaching: 24/4/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES LESSON 2: A/ FAMOUS PLACES IN ASIA (A3,4). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about famous places in Asia. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education..

(292) - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(4’) - T: Call some students to correct exercise 1 in the workbook on page 99. - T: Call on some others listen and remark. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm - up.(1’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to correct exercise.. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Pre - reading.(10’) - T: Ask students to look at the section A3 on page 156 and introduce: This is one pilot’s schedule from Monday to Sunday. You listen to the tape and complete the schedule by writing the name of places that pilot flew to. - T: Let them listen to the tape three times. - T: Ask them to listen and fill the information in the schedule. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read their answers aloud before the class and others listen and remark. - T: Let them listen to the tape at the last time and give the correct answers. * Tape transcript. On Monday, I flew to Bangkok and then. 3. Listen and complete this pilot’s schedule with the correct place. - Ss: look at the section A3 and listen.. - Ss: listen to the tape three times. - Ss: listen and fill in the table. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give the result before the class. - Ss: listen to the tape at last time, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. Monday Bangkok and Singapore.

(293) to Singapore. I stayed Monday and Tuesday nights in a hotel. Then on Wednesday, I flew to Jakarta. I stayed overnight and on Thursday I flew to Bali. I stayed there Thursday and Friday. On Friday night, I went to a culture show and saw some Balinese dancers. On Saturday, I flew to Hong Kong. I was there overnight. On Sunday, I finally flew back to Ha Noi. * While - reading.(17’). Tuesday. Singapore. Wednesday. Jakarta. Thursday. Bali. Friday. Bali. Saturday. Hong Kong. Sunday. Back to Ha Noi. 4. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: answer the teacher’s questions.. - T: Come on asking the students some questions: (?) What kind of tourism do you like most ? (?) If you are interested in history/ ocean/ cultural … where can we go ? - T: Let them listen to the section A4 once. - Ss: listen to the passage once. - T: Introduce some new words and groups words. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + attraction(n) điểm thu hút + ancient monument (n) lăng mộ cổ Khmer/ Buddhist temple (n) đền thờ của người Khmer và người theo đạo Phật + puppet show (n) buổi biểu diễn múa rối + resort (n) khu nghỉ mát + coral (n) san hô - Ss: listen and repeat the words three times. - T: Let them listen to the words three - Ss: look at the pictures and listen to the times following the teacher. teacher’s introduction. - T: Ask them to look at the pictures and introduce: “ We are going to read the passage about tourism attractions in South – East Asia. You read and tell me what are the destinations and their special features. - Ss: read the passage and find out the - T: Ask them to read the passage answers carefully then find the answers to the.

(294) questions given. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers and others listen and remark. - T: Correct and give the correct answers.. * Post - reading.(8’). - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: answer the questions in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answer keys. a. The three kinds of tourist attractions mentioned in the passage are ancient monuments, show and resorts. b. Student’s answer. I prefer the tradition of different cultural. - Ss: listen and answer the teacher’s questions. - T: Give some extra questions and ask them to answer. (?) What are two examples of the ancient monuments ? (?) Where can we see colorful dances ? (?) What can we see in Indonesia ? (?) What can we do when we go to the - Ss: practice in pairs. sea ? - Ss: work in front of the class. - T: Ask them to practice in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work in front of - Ss: listen and correct if necessary. the class. - T: Listen and remark. - Ss: Listen and remember. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the content of the lesson. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. - Ask them to learn by heart the new words. - Sum up the content of the text in the exercise book. - Do exercise 3,4,5 in the workbook on page 100 and 101. - Prepare the next period “ B1” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………..

(295) + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================. Date of preparing: 23/4/2014. PERIOD 98. Date of teaching: 25/4/2014 - Class 7A,B,C. UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES LESSON 3: B/ FAMOUS PEOPLE (B1). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about a famous hero of Viet Nam as General Giap. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson.(4’) - T: Call student go to the board to sum up the content of the reading and answer the teacher’s questions. - T: Call on some others to listen and remark. - T: Remark and get points.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do as the teacher requests.. * Warm - up.(1’) - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen to the teacher..

(296) b. Teaching the new lesson. * Presentation.(15’) - T: Hang the photo of the General Giap and the victory of Dien Bien Phu on the board and ask the students: (?) Who is in the picture ? (?) Do you know any thing about the person ? (?) Which victory is in the picture about ?. 1. Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: look at the picture and answer the teacher’s questions.. - T: Introduce: You are going to read the conversation between Ba and Liz about General Vo Nguyen Giap. we will know more about this famous figure. - T: Let them listen to the tape once. - T: Introduce and explain some new words in the text.. - Ss: listen to the teacher’s introduction.. - Ss: listen to the dialogue once. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + history quiz (n) cuộc thi lịch sử + General (n) Đại Tướng + lead (v) lãnh đạo + People’s Army of Viet Nam + Commander in Chief (n) Tổng chỉ huy + force (n) lực lượng + defeat (v) đánh bại - Ss: listen and repeat the words three times. - Ss: read the words in front of the class.. - T: Have them listen and repeat the new words three times. - T: Call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. * Now, check the right column. Then correct the false sentences. * Practice. - Ss: listen and do exercise. - T: Guide: Now you look at the section “ Now check the right column. Then correct the false sentences” and decide the sentences are True or False. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class. Others listen and remark. - T: Remark and give the correct answers.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read aloud their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Correct answers..

(297) a. F Liz knows nothing about General Giap. b. F The people’s Army of Viet Nam defeated the French in 1954. c. T d. F General Giap was born in 1911 e. T f. F Ba’ll lend Liz some history book. - Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs * Production.(10’) - Ss: work it in front of the class. - T: Come on asking them to practice the conversation in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to work it in front of the class. - T: Listen and remark if necessary.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the main information about the famous people as General Gap.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to learn by heart the new words. - Do exercises 1,2 on page 102 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B2,3” before going to school. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================. Date of preparing: 23/4/2014. Date of teaching: 25/5/2014 - Class 7A,B,C.

(298) PERIOD 99. UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES LESSON 4: B/ FAMOUS PEOPLE (B2,3). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about some famous soccer players and the famous historical place which is Dien Bien Phu. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Time Teacher’s activities 5’ a. Checking the previous lesson.. Students’ activities. - T: Call students go to the board to - Ss: Go to the board to do as the tell about their favorite people and the teacher requests. information of them. - T: Call on some others to remark and correct if necessary. - T: Remark and get points. * Warm - up. - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. b. Teaching the new lesson. 15’. * Pre - reading.(15’) - T: Introduce and guide: We are going to read a conversation between Hoa and Lan. they are talking about Romario and Pele. You read and complete it by using the words in the box to fill the gaps. - T: Let them compare their answers. 2. Practice. - Ss: listen to the teacher’s introduction and do exercise. a. Complete this dialogue with the words in the box. Then practice with a partner. - Ss: compare their answers with a.

(299) with a partner. - T: Call on some pairs to practice the completed conversation in front of the class. Others listen and remark. - T: Listen, remark and give the correct answers.. - T: Come on explaining the request of the section b, Now make your own dialogues about famous people you know, the adjective in the box will help you. - T: Go around the class and help them if necessary. - T: Call on some pairs to work their own dialogues in front of the class. - T: Listen and remark ( Can get points for the students). partner. - Ss: practice the completed dialogue in pairs. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. * Answers. 1. like 2. prefer 3. guess 4. favorite b. Now make your own dialogues about famous people you know, the adjective in the box will help you. - Ss: listen to the teacher’s request.. - Ss: work in pairs in front of the class. Model dialogue. S1: Do you like My Tam ? S2: No, not very much. I prefer Thanh Thao. S1: Why ? S2: Because, she sings better then My Tam.. 15’. * While - reading. - T: Guide: Now you work in groups making a list of things you know and the things you want to know about Dien Bien Phu. - T: Introduce and explain some new words which are importance in the text.. 3. Read. Then answer the questions. - Ss: make a list of things about Dien Bien Phu. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + tourist destination (n)điểm thu hút khách du lịch.

(300) - T: Let them listen and repeat the new words three times. - T: Call on some students to read them again to check their pronunciation. - T: Explain the request of the lesson: “ You are going to read a passage about Dien Bien Phu. You read it and answer the questions. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers before the class. Others listen and remark if necessary. - T: Correct and give the correct answers. 5’. * Post - reading.(5’). + Battle site (n) trận địa + Battle veterans (n) cựu chiến binh + scenery (n) quang cảnh + hospitality (n) long hiếu khách + valley (n) thung lũng + trading center (n) trung tâm thương mại + ethnic minorities (n) dt thiểu số + border(n) biên giới - Ss: listen and repeat the words three times. - Ss: read the words again in front of the class. * Questions. - Ss: listen and do exercise.. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: give their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and write in the exercise book. *Answer keys. a. People can visit the battle side in Dien Bien Phu. b. Tourist can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the Muong Thanh Valley visit the neighboring villages and share the hospitality of the local people. c. Dien Bien Phu is only 30 kilometers from the Laos’ border, so it is an important trading center. - Ss: read the passage again in front of the class.. - T: Call on some students to read the passage again. Others listen and remark. - T: come on asking ss to translate the - Ss: translate it into Vietnamese. passage into Vietnamese. - T: Remark and correct their.

(301) pronunciation if necessary. 3’. 2’. c. Consolidation.(3’) - Repeat the information about Dien Bien Phu and the structures. d. Guide the homework.(2’) - Ask them to tearn by heart the new words and translate the passage into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 3 on page 103 in the workbook. - Prepare the next period “B4,5” before going to school.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book.. * REMARK AFTER TEACHING: + Nội dung:………………………………………………………………… + Phương pháp:……………………………………………………………. + Kiến thức:………………………………………………………………. + Thời gian:……………………………………………………………….. ============================================.

(302) Date of preparing: 02/5/2010. PERIOD 100. Date of teaching: 06/5/2010 - Class 7A 06/5/2010 - Class 7B 06/5/2010 - Class 7C. UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES LESSON 5: B/ FAMOUS PEOPLE (B4,5). 1. OBJECTIVE. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about the famous people as Thomas Edison, Hans Christian Andersen and Ho Chi President.. Minh. b. Skills. - Improve ss’ skills: reading, speaking, writing, listening. c. Education. - Educate ss love their lesson. 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, chalk. b. Students : Books, pens; prepare the new lesson before going to school. 3. PROCEDURE. Time 7’. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson. - T: Call students go to the board to sum up the content of the reading about Dien Bien Phu on their ideas. - T: Listen and get points.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do as the teacher requests.. * Warm – up. - T: Introduce: In this period you are - Ss: listen and answer the teacher’s going to read a passage about two questions. famous people: Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen. (?) What do you know about these people ? (?) Now you work in groups making a list of the facts about them..

(303) b. Teaching the new lesson. 4. Read 10’. * Pre - reading. - T: Introduce and explain some new words.. - T: Let them listen and repeat the words twice. - T: Call on some students to read the words again to check their pronunciation. 13’. - Ss: listen and write in the exercise book. * New words. + bulb (n) bóng đèn tròn + power station (n) nhà máy phát điện + Gramophone (n) máy nghe nhạc + motion pictures (n) phim điện ảnh + novel (n) tiểu thuyết + Poetry (n) thơ ca + fairy tales (n) truyện cổ tích. - Ss: listen and repeat the new words. - Ss: read the words again in front of the class.. * While - reading. - T: Ask them to read the passage about Thomas Edison and Hans Christian Andersen to keep the main content of the lesson. - T: Give the questions to check their understanding of the lesson. (?) When was Thomas Edison born ? (?) When did he die ? (?) What did Thomas Edison invent ? (?) What were his other invention ? (?) When was Andersen born ? (?) When did he die ? (?) Was Andersen’ family rich ? (?) What did he write ?. - Ss: read the passage.. - T: Explain the request of the reading. - T: Ask them to work in pairs asking and answering about two famous people. - T: Call on some pairs to work in front of the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary.. - Ss: listen.. - Ss: answer the questions.. - Ss: practice in pairs: asking and answering about two famous people. - Ss: practice in front of the class. * Now work with a partner..

(304) - T: Listen and correct their mistakes if necessary.. 10’. A: When was you born, Mr. Thomas ? B: I was born in 1847. A: Were you born in America ? B: Yes, I was. …………………………………….. ……………………………………... * Post - reading. 5. Listen. Complete the table. - T: Ask them to look at the picture in the section B5 and introduce” HCM is a great figure in the history. We all know about him. Now you look at the map and tell me What the places in it meant in Uncle’s life ? - T: Ask them to look at the table and structures. - T: Guide: You are going to listen to the tape summarizing the biography of Uncle Ho. You listen and complete the table. You have to fill either the name of years or the names of places according to the events on your right hand. - T: Let them listen to the tape three times. - T: Have them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class. Others listen, remark and correct if necessary. - T: Let them listen to the tape at last time and give the correct answers. Tape transcript Ho Chi Minh was born in 1890 in Nghe An Province. In the village of Kim Lien. When he was 21 years old, he left Viet Nam and traveled to Africa, England and America. After this he worked in a hotel in Lon Don in early 1900s. Then moved to Paris in 1917. He spent six years in Paris. One year in Moscow and then moved. - Ss: look at the pictures and listen.. - Ss: look at the table and structures. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. - Ss: listen to the tape three times. - Ss: compare their answers with a partner. - Ss: read aloud their answers in front of the class. - Ss: listen, correct and fill correct information in the table..

(305) Date of birth. 1911 1900s 1917. 1890. Year. Sai Gon Lon Don Paris. Kim Lien. Place. d. Guide the homework. - Ask them to learn by heart the new words. - Do exercise 4 in the exercise book on page 130. - Prepare the next period “ Language Focus 5” before going to school.. Left Viet Nam Worked in a hotel Went to another country. 2’. Moscow Guangzhou Viet Nam Viet Nam Viet Nam c. Consolidation. - Repeat the content of the lesson.. 1923 1930 1941 1945 1969. 3’. Moved again Found Vietnamese Communist Party Formed Viet Minh Became President Died. to Guangzhou. He founded the Indochinese Communist Party when he was living in Guangzhou. During the 1930s HCM continued to travel and after his return to VN he formed the Viet Minh in 1941. Four years later, he became President of the Democratic Republic of VN after VN declared its independence. HCM died in Ha Noi In !969, but he will always be remembered by the Vietnamese people.. - Ss: Listen and remember. - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book..

(306) Date of preparing: 02/5/2010. PERIOD 101. Date of teaching: 07/5/2010 - Class 7A 08/5/2010 - Class 7B 08/5/2010 - Class 7C. LANGUAGE FOCUS 5. 1. OBJECTIVE . a. Knowledge . - By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to revise all the knowledge which they’ve learnt from Unit 13 to Unit 16 by doing exercises in Language focus 5 b. Skill . - Improve 4 skills. c. Education . - The students like learning English . 2. PREPARATION . a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures, chalk . b. Students : Books, pens, prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3. PROCEDURE Time. 1’. Teacher’s activities a. Checking the previous lesson. ( Optional). Students’ activities. * Warm - up. - T: introduce the content of the lesson.. - Ss: listen to the teacher.. b. Teaching the new lesson. 9’. * Review Adjectives and Adverbs. - T: Repeat quickly the use and the form of adjectives and adverbs. - T: Explain the request of exercise. - T: Ask them to do exercise. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to go to the board to complete the table.. 1. Adjectives and Adverbs. a. Check the correct box. Adjective Adverb dangerous V slowly V skillfully V good V bad V quickly V b. Complete the sentences..

(307) - T: Look at the board and remark. Then give the correct answers.. 15’. * Review the modal verbs. - T: Repeat the use and form of the modal verbs quickly. - T: Ask them to work the dialogue in pairs. - T: Call on some pairs to practice it before the class. - T: Ask them to make the similar dialogue depend on the pictures and the words in the box. - T: Call on some pairs to work their dialogues in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if necessary.. A. quickly B. slowly C. good D. dangerous E. skillful. 2. Modal verbs. a. Work with a partner. Read the dialogue.. b. Look at the pictures and the words. Make up similar dialogues. A: Can I play soccer, Mom ? First you must practice the piano. B: Can I play badminton, Mom ? First you must clean up your room. C: Can I go fishing, Mom ? First you must post this letter. D: Can I watch TV, Mom ? First, you must go to the market. E: Can I go roller-skating, Mom ? First, you must go to the library. c. Hoa has a few problems. Give her some advice, using should or ought to. A. I’m sick: You should go to the doctor. B. I’m hot: You should take a shower. C. I’m cold: You ought to put a thick coat on. D. I’m tired: You should/ ought to relax..

(308) 5’. * Review “ Expressing likes and dislikes. - T: Ask them to look at the menu. - T: Ask them to work in pairs using the structures. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some pairs to work before the class. - T: Listen and correct if necessary.. 3. Expressing likes and dislikes. A: What would you like to eat ? B: I’d like Shrimp cakes. A: Would you like fresh fish with lemon sauce ? B: Yes. That sounds nice. A: Would you like ginger chicken ? B: I prefer sweet and sour chicken. A: Would you like rice noodles ? B: I don’t really like rice noodles. I’d like fried rice.. 5’. * Review “Tenses” 4. Tenses. - T: Ask them to do exercise 4” Read the sentences. Check the correct Read the sentences. Check the column. correct column. - T: Let them compare their answers with a partner. - T: Call on some students to give their Past Present Future answers in front of the class. a. V - T: Listen, remark and give the correct b. V answers. c. V d. V e. V f. V g. V h. V i. V j. V. 5’. * Review the question and answer about the reason “Why..?/ Because,..” - T: Ask them to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T: Ask them to make the dialogues using the words in the box. - T: Call on some pairs to works their dialogues in front of the class. - T: Listen, remark and correct if. 5. Because a. Read the dialogue. Now work with a partner. Make up similar dialogues. Use the words in the table and the box to help you. b. Ask your partner..

(309) necessary.. 3’. c. Consolidation. - Repeat the content of the lesson.. 2’. d. Guide the homework. - Ask them to redo all the exercises in Language focus 5 in the exercise book. - Prepare the next period “Review” before going to school.. Take turns to be A A: What is your favorite TV program? B: Cartoons. A: Why ? B: Because, it’s exciting. A: Cartoons is my favorite program, too. I prefer it because it’s interesting. - Listen and remember. - Listen and write in the exercise book..

(310) Date of preparing: 02/5/2010. PERIOD 102. Date of teaching: 09/5/2010 - Class 7A 09/5/2010 - Class 7B 09/5/2010 - Class 7C. REVIEW. 1. OBJECTIVE . a. Knowledge . - By the end of the lesson : Students will be able to consolidate knowledge and do exercise to practice the structure and the new words they have learnt. b. Skill . - Improve 4 skills. c. Education . - The students like learning English . 2. PREPARATION . a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures, chalk . b. Students : Books, pens, prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3. PROCEDURE Time Teacher’s activities 5’ a. Checking the previous lesson. - Call some students to go to the board to repeat the use and form of the tenses in the present and the past. - Call on some others listen and remark. - Remark and get points.. Students’ activities - Go to the board to do as the teacher requests.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Give some kinds of exercises for the students to review all the knowledge which they’ve learnt. 8’. - Do some kinds of the exercise.. * Question 1. Write the sentences. Use the cue words.. * Question 1.. a. Minh/ like/ listen/ pop music. ->…………………………………... a. Minh likes listening to pop music..

(311) b. Most/ old/ people/ like/ watch TV. ->…………………………………… c. Lan/ not/ really/ like/ watch sports on TV. ->……………………………………. d. Chi/ prefer/ pop music/ classical music. ->……………………………………. 7’. b. Most old people like watching TV. c. Lan doesn’t really like watching sports on TV. d. Chi prefers pop music to classical music.. * Question 2. Choose the best answer from a, b or c to complete these sentences.. * Question 2.. 1. How far is it ……HaNoi to SonLa? a. for b. from c. to 2. My house is ……..post office and bookstore. a. between b. in front of c. opposite 3. He is the ……… pupil in my class. a. tall b. taller c. tallest 4. What about ………TV ? Ok a. watch b. watches c. watching. 1. b 2. a. 3. c 4. c. 10’. 10’. * Question 3. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in the brackets.. * Question 3.. 1. She ……. to music now. (listen) 2. Nam……to school yesterday. (not go) 3. I…….. my grandparents last week. (meet) 4. the old people usually…… in the morning and the evening.(walk). 1. ….. is listening…….. 2. …...went ………….. 3. ……met ………….. 4. ……. walk ………….. * Question 4. Read the passage. Make * Question 4. questions then answer the questions. Alexander Push kin is a famous writer in Russian Literature. He was born in Moscow in 1799. He grew up in a rich family. He went to school when he was.

(312) 12 and he finished his school in 1817. He got married Nathalie Goncharova in 1830. In his life he wrote novels, stories and poetry. He died in 1836. Questions 1. where/ Alexander Pushkin/ born ? 2. When/ he/ finish/ school ?. 1. Where was Alexander Pushkin born ? He was born in Moscow. 2. When did he finish school ? He finished his school in 1817.. 3’ 2’. c. Consolidation. - Repeat the content of the review.. - Ss: listen and remember.. d. Guide the homework. - Ask the to redo all the exercises in the - Ss: write in the exercise book. exercise book. - Prepare the next period “Review” before going to school..

(313) Date of preparing: 08/5/2010. PERIOD 103. Date of teaching: 10/5/2010 - Class 7A 10/5/2010 - Class 7B 11/5/2010 - Class 7C. REVIEW. 1. OBJECTIVE . a. Knowledge . - By the end of the lesson : Students will be able to consolidate knowledge and do exercise to practice the structure and the new words they have learnt. b. Skill . - Improve 4 skills. c. Education . - The students like learning English . 2. PREPARATION . a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures, chalk . b. Students : Books, pens, prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3. PROCEDURE Time Teacher’s activities 5’ a. Checking the previous lesson. - T: Call some students go to the board to redo the exercises in the last period. - T: Look at the board and get points.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do as the teacher requests.. b. Teaching the new lesson. * Give some kinds of exercises for the students to review all the knowledge which they’ve learnt in the last periods.. - Ss: Do some kinds of the exercises. * Question 1.. 8’. *Question 1 . Complete the sentences with the correct form in the bracket. 1 . What is your sister......( do ) now ? - She .....( cook )lunch in the kitchen . 2 . We………..( not go ) camping next week. we ......... ( visit ) museum.. 1. ………. doing ………… - ………is cooking…….. 2. ……… aren’t going……. …………are visiting……..

(314) 7’. 10’. 10’. 3 . Mr thanh ..............( be ) a teacher. She ..............( teach ) in a school in the town center.. 3. ………. is……………… ……….is teaching………. * Question 2 . answer.. * Question 2.. Choose the best. 1 . we .....................in class 7A A . is B . am C . are D . be 2 . Her birthday is on the ................of July. A . twelve B . twelveth C . twelfth D . twelf 3 . Duyen ...... with us to the museum next weekend . A . won't go B . doesn't will go C . won't goes D . not will go 4 . Lan will be eighteen .............her next birthday. A . in B . at C . of D . on. 1. C. * Question 3 . Hãy sắp xếp những tháng trong năm theo thứ tự.. * Question 3.. June May February March April January September August November July October December 1........................ 2............................ 3.......................... 4 ........................ 5............................ 6........................... 7......................... 8............................ 9............................ 10........................ 11.......................... 12........................... * Question4 . Read then write. 2. C. 3. A. 4. D. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.. January February March April May June July August September October November December * Question 4..

(315) true(T) or fase (F) for sentences. Even before it is born , a baby has small teeth under its gum. At about the age of six months . It's first tooth starts to grow . Before the young child is three years old , it has twenty small teeth . Between the ages of six and twelve a second set of teeth from in the gum below the first teeth and put them out . 1. T 1 . A baby has teeth under its gum even before it’s birth. 2. F 2 . A baby's first tooth appear as soon as it's born. 3. T 3 . A three years old child has twenty small teeth. 4. F 4 . A child's second set of teeth appear before it's six years old . 3’ c. Consolidation. - Repeat the content of the review.. - Ss: Listen and remember.. 2’ d. Guide the homework. - Ask the to redo all the exercises in the - Ss: Listen and write in the exercise book. exercise book. - Prepare the next period “Review” before going to school..

(316) Date of preparing: 08/5/2010. PERIOD 104. Date of teaching: 13/5/2010 - Class 7A 11/5/2010 - Class 7B 11/5/2010 - Class 7C. REVIEW. 1. OBJECTIVE . a. Knowledge . - By the end of the lesson : Students will be able to consolidate knowledge and do exercise to practice the structure and the new words they have learnt. b. Skill . - Improve 4 skills. c. Education . - The students like learning English . 2. PREPARATION . a. Teacher : Teaching plan , textbook , pictures, chalk . b. Students : Books, pens, prepare the new lesson before going to school . 3. PROCEDURE Time Teacher’s activities 5’ a. Checking the previous lesson. - T: Call some students go to the board to redo the exercises in the last period. - T: Look at the board and get points.. Students’ activities - Ss: Go to the board to do as the teacher requests.. b. Teaching the new lesson.. 6’. * Give some kinds of exercises for the students to review all the knowledge which they’ve learnt in the last periods.. - Ss: Do some kinds of the exercises.. * Question 1. Circle the best answer.. * Question 1.. 1. Yesterday, I …… soccer with my classmates. A. play B. playing C. played 2. He usually…….. TV at 8 pm. A. watch B. watches C. watched 3. Lan: I do not like bananas.. 1. C 2. B 3. B.

(317) Ba : ……………………… A. So do I B. Neither do I C. I do neither. 4. He is a ………. teacher. A. good B. well C. goodly. 8’. * Question 2. Match column A with column B.. 4. A * Question 2.. A 1. 2. 3. 4.. wash your hands Don’t eat Do morning exercises Brush your teeth. B a. …………. twice a day. b. …………. a lot of sweets. c. …………. before meals. d. …………. every morning. 1. – c. 8’. * Question 3. Underline the correct words. 1. 2. 3. 4.. 8’. 5’. She sings very(bad/ badly). 1. He is a (good/ well) teacher. 2. He writes (careless/ carelessly). 3. They are (slow/ slowly) workers.4.. 2. – b. 4. – a. * Question 3. badly good carelessly slow. * Question 4. Arrange words into complete sentences.. * Question 4.. 1. did/ time/ you/ what/ to bed/ go/ yesterday evening/ ? ->…………………………………… 2. I/ listen/ to/ music/ like/ night/ at. ->……………………………………. 1. What time did you go to bed yesterday evening ?. * Question 5. Answer the questions about you.. * Question 5.. 2. I like listening to music at night.. 1. Which programs on TV do you like ? Students’ answers 2. What do you usually do on the weekend ? 3’. 3. – d. c. Consolidation..

(318) - Repeat the content of the lesson. 2’. d. Guide the homework. - Ask them to review the whole knowledge which they’ve learnt. - Prepare the next period “ The second semester test”.. Date of preparing: 09/5/2010. PERIOD 105. - Ss: Listen and remember - Ss: Review and prepare the next period “ the second semester test”. Date of teaching: 14/5/2010 - Class 7A 15/5/2010 - Class 7B 15/5/2010 - Class 7C. TEST “THE SECOND SEMESTER”. 1. OBJECTIVE - TEST to check their knowledge. 2. THE CONTENT OF THE TEST.. *** QUESTIONS ***. TEST “THE SECOND SEMESTER” Name: ............................................. Class: 7............................................. Mark. * Question 1: Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. (3 pts) 1. How...............is the blue hat ?.

(319) A. far. B. much. C. many. 2. After the holiday they returned to Ha Noi..............bus. A. by B. on C. in 3. Mai likes...............TV in her free time . A. to watch B. watches. C. watch. 4. How..............is it from Hue to Da Nang ? A. many B. much C. far 5. Ba wanted to buy some English books and he went to the................ A. library B. bookstore C. clothing store 6. You should ................ your hands before meals. A. wash B. washing C. to wash * Question 2: Match the questions in Column A with their answers in Column B (2 pts) A B 1. What is his family’s name ? A. 12 Tran Hung Dao Stress. 2. What is his full name ? B. He goes to Le Quy Don School. 3. What is his age ? C. He is 40 kilos. 4. Which school does he go to ? D. He is fourteen . 5. Which class is he in ? E. Nguyen Van Hung . 6. Where does he live ? F. Class 7A. 7. What is his height ? G. 1,50 meters. 8 . How heavy is he ? H. It’s Nguyen . The answers 1 - _____ 5 - _____. 2 - _____ 6 - _____. 3 - _____ 7 - _____. 4 - _____ 8 - _____. * Question 3: Fill in the gaps with the correct form of the verbs in the brackets to complete the sentences.(2 pts) 1. We (be) ..............at the seaside for ten days last summer. 2. They (do) ............morning exercise every day. 3. Yesterday, Hoa and her aunt (go) ............ to the market. 4. The students of Le Do school (have) ..............a medical check -up at the moment. * Question 4: Read the passage and answer the questions below.(3 pts) In the summer holiday, Mr. Hung, Mrs. Chi ,and their children, Tuan and Hoa often go to the beach for two or three days . They always go to Vung Tau in the South of Viet Nam . They usually stay in a small house or flat by the sea , but sometimes, they stay in a hotel..

(320) Last summer , they went to Nha Trang . They stayed at sunshine hotel or three days . In the morning, Tuan played football with his father on the beach . Hoa and her mother walked along the beach and built sandcastles . They visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium and saw different kinds of fish there . They also bought a lots of souvenirs for friends. **Questions** 1. Where does Hoa’s family often go for their summer holidays ? 2. Where do they usually stay ? 3. Did they go to Vung Tau last summer ? 4. What did Hoa and her mother do in the morning ? 5. Did they visit Tri Nguyen Aquarium ? 6. What did they see there ?. 3. ANSWER KEYS. * Question 1 :(3 pts) Mỗi ý đúng 0,5 điểm 1. B 4. C 2. A 5.B 3. A 6.A * Question 2 : (2 pts ) Mỗi ý đúng 0,25 điểm 1.h 2.e 3. d 4. b 5.f 6.a 7.g 8. c *Question 3 : (2 pts ) Mỗi ý đúng 0,5 điểm 1. were 2. do 3. went 4. are having 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.. * Question 4 :(3 pts ) Mỗi ý đúng 0,5 điểm They often go to the beach. They usually stay in a small house or a flat by the sea . No, they didn’t. Hoa and her mother walked a long the beach and built sandcastles. Yes, they did . They saw different kinds of fish there..

(321) 4. REMARK . Knowledge ……………………………………………………………………… Skill ……………………………………………………………………………... Decorate ………………………………………………………………………… Express …………………………………………………………………………...

(322)

GIAO AN TIENG ANH 7 NAM HOC 20132014

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về